Ekran System v.6.3 Help File

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Ekran System v.6.3 Help File"

Transcription

1 Ekran System v.6.3 Help File

2 Table of Contents About System Requirements Program Structure Getting Started Deployment Process Working with Application Server and Database About Database Types Comparison High Availability Mode About Standard and High Availability Modes Comparison Installing Remote PostgreSQL Database Server Installing/Uninstalling/Updating the Server Installing the Server Backing up Ekran Master Certificate Deleting Ekran Master Certificate Importing Ekran Master Certificate Installing the Server in the Cloud Adding Server Executable to Windows Firewall Using an External/Cloud-Based Server Computer Updating the Server Uninstalling the Server Changing Server Port for Client Connection Server Tray Database Management About Cleanup Parameters One-Time Cleanup Scheduled Cleanup Shrinking MS SQL Database Autovacuuming PostgreSQL Database

3 Firebird Database Optimization Deleting the Client Moving the Server Database About Moving the Server Database on the Same Computer Moving the Server Database to Another Computer Moving Binary Data to Shared or Local Folder Validating Monitoring Data About Validating Monitoring Data Using Hash Codes Signing Monitoring Data with Certificate Moving the Server Database Signed with Certificate to another Computer Deleting PostgreSQL Database Isolating Database from Clients Advanced SIEM Integration About Log File Contents Enabling Log File Creation Log Cleanup Management Tool About Management Tool Installation Prerequisites Prerequisites Overview Turning on Internet Information Service (IIS) Turning on IIS for Windows 8 and Windows Turning on IIS for Windows Server 2008 R Turning on IIS for Windows Server Installing.NET Framework Configuring Internet Information Service (IIS) Using Certificates Generating Self-Signed Certificate Exporting Self-Signed Certificate Importing Trusted Certificate Adding Certificate to Trusted Root Certification Authorities Setting HTTPS Binding for a Default Web-Site

4 Installing/Uninstalling/Updating the Management Tool Installing the Management Tool Adjusting Computer for Remote Access Updating Management Tool Uninstalling Management Tool Opening Management Tool Management Tool Interface Changing Password for Logged in User Multi-Tenant Mode/Single-Tenant Ekran System Mode About User Types in Ekran System Deployed in Multi-Tenant Mode Admin of the default tenant (Technician) Tenant Admin Tenant User Enabling Multi-Tenant Mode Tenant Management Viewing Tenants Adding Tenants Editing Tenants Decreasing Granted Licenses Number Resending to the Tenant Admin Changing the Domain Tenant Admin Deleting Tenants Switching to Tenant Account Granting Technician Access to Tenant Account Data Licensing General Licensing Information Getting Licenses by the Default Tenant Admin (Technician) About Serial Keys About Update & Support Period Viewing License State Activating Serial Keys Online Adding Activated Serial Keys Offline Deactivating Serial Keys Viewing Licenses Granted to Tenants

5 License Management Getting License Information (Tenant Admin) Client License Management User and User Group Management About Viewing Users and User Groups User Management Adding Users Editing Users Deleting Users User Group Management Adding User Groups Editing User Groups Deleting User Groups Permissions About Administrative Permissions Client Permissions Permission Example Management Tool Log About Viewing Management Tool Log Management Tool Log Protection Filtering and Sorting Log Data Windows Clients About Monitoring via Windows Clients Installing Windows Clients About Setting up Environment for Remote Installation Windows Client Installation Prerequisites Disabling Simple File Sharing in Windows XP Disabling Sharing Wizard in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, and Windows Checking System Services

6 Setting up Firewall for Windows Vista, Windows XP, and Windows Server Setting up Firewall for Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server Installing Windows Clients Remotely via the Management Tool About Selecting Computers Remote Windows Client Installation Process Remote Installation from an Existing.INI File Installing Windows Clients Locally About Windows Client Installation Package Generating Windows Client Installation Package Installing Windows Clients Locally with Custom Monitoring Parameters Downloading Windows Client Installation File (.exe) Installing Windows Clients Locally without.ini File Installation via Third Party Software Installing Windows Client on Amazon WorkSpace loning a Virtual Machine with Installed Client Unassigning License on Virtual Machine Shutdown Golden Image Mode for the Server Unassigning License via the Script on the Client Side Updating Windows Clients About Windows Client Status after Server Update Updating Windows Clients Automatically Updating Windows Client Manually Reconnecting Windows Clients to another Server Uninstalling Windows Clients About Client Uninstallation Key Uninstalling Windows Clients Remotely Uninstalling Windows Clients Locally Viewing Windows Clients Windows Client Description

7 Windows Client Configuration About Protected Mode Parameter Automatic Client Update Parameter Client Tray Icon Parameter Jump Server Parameter Offline Clients Detection Parameter Custom Path for Client Installation Folder Parameter Offline Cache Size Parameter User Activity Recording Parameters Keystroke Logging Parameter Start Monitoring on Keyword Parameter Keystroke Filtering Parameter Detect system IDLE event Parameter Register IDLE event Parameter Clipboard Monitoring Parameter Monitoring Log Parameter URL Monitoring Parameters Application Filtering Parameters User Filtering Parameters Monitoring Time Filtering Parameters IP Filtering Parameters Forced User Authentication Parameter Two-Factor Authentication Parameter Additional Message on User Login Parameter User s Comment Parameter Ticket Number Parameter Editing Windows Client Configuration Viewing Windows Client Configuration Forced User Authentication on Windows Clients About Enabling Forced User Authentication on Windows Client Granting User Permission to Log In Managing One-Time Passwords About

8 Generating One-Time Password Viewing One-Time Passwords Resending the Terminating One-Time Password Manually Logging In Logging in Using Ekran System User Additional Credentials Logging in Using One-Time Password Requesting One-Time Password Login Approved by Administrator About Approving User Access on Login Defining Address for User Access Approval Managing Restricted User List Adding User to Restricted List Deleting User from Restricted List Logging In Restricting User Access by Time About Granting Access for a Certain Period of Time Deleting User from Restricted List Privileged User Accounts and Session Management (PASM) About Using Privileged User Accounts Password Vault Configuration Defining Domain Administrator Credentials Adding Privileged User Editing Privileged Account Deactivating Privileged Account Using Privileged Account Viewing Privileged Sessions Informing about Monitoring About Enabling Displaying Additional Message Enabling User s Comment Option Enabling Displaying Client Tray Icon

9 Logging In Integration with Ticketing Systems About Enabling Ticket Number Option Logging In macos Clients About Monitoring via macos Clients Installing macos Client About Downloading macos Client Installation File Installing macos Clients Uninstalling macos Clients About Uninstalling macos Clients Remotely Uninstalling macos Clients Locally Viewing macos Clients macos Client Description macos Client Configuration About User Activity Recording Parameters URL Monitoring Parameters Linux Clients About Monitoring via Linux Clients Remote SSH Session Monitoring Local Sessions Monitoring (for X Window System) Installing Linux Client About Downloading Linux Client Installation File Installing Linux Clients Updating Linux Clients About Linux Client Status after Server Update Updating Linux Clients Automatically

10 Updating Linux Client Manually Uninstalling Linux Clients Viewing Linux Clients Linux Client Description Offline Clients Detection Parameter Offline Cache Size Parameter Command Output Skipping Parameter User Filtering Parameters Forced User Authentication on Linux Clients About Enabling Forced User Authentication on Linux Client Granting the User Permission to Work with the Terminal Launching the Terminal Restricting User Access by Time About Granting Access for a Certain Period of Time Deleting User from Restricted List Two-Factor Authentication for Windows Clients About Allowing User to Log In Deleting User from the List Enabling Two-Factor Authentication Logging in Using Time-Based One-Time Password User Blocking About Blocking User from Live Session Blocking User from Finished Session Blocking User on Alert Triggering Blocking User on Client with Secondary Authentication Blocked User List Viewing Blocked User List Removing User from Blocked User List Client Group Management About Adding Client Groups

11 Editing Client Groups Adding Clients to Groups Adding Clients to Groups during Client Group Editing Adding Clients to Groups during Client Editing Applying Group Settings to Client Removing Clients from Groups Removing Clients from Groups during Client Group Editing Removing Clients from Groups during Client Editing Deleting Client Groups Alerts About Viewing Alerts Default Alerts Alerts Management Adding Alerts Rules About Rule Examples Enabling/Disabling Alerts Editing Alerts Editing Single Alert Editing Multiple Alerts Assigning Alerts to Clients Assigning Alerts to Clients during Alert Editing Assigning Alerts to Clients during Editing Multiple Alerts Assigning Alerts to Clients during Client/Client Group Editing Exporting and Importing Alerts Exporting Alerts Importing Alerts Deleting Alerts Defining Global Alert Settings Receiving Information on Alert Events Advanced Reports About Report Types

12 Report Customization Scheduled Reports About Adding Report Rules Editing Report Rules Deleting Report Rules Generating Reports from the Scheduled Report Rule Frequency and Time Interval for Report Creation Viewing Logs Report Generator About Report Parameters Generating Report Creating a Scheduled Report Rule from the Report Generator Page USB Monitoring & Blocking About Monitored Devices Kernel-Level USB Monitoring Rules About Adding USB Monitoring Rules Editing USB Monitoring Rules Deleting USB Monitoring Rules Defining Exceptions for USB Rules Viewing Device Hardware ID Configuration Settings Available for Default Tenant Admin (Technician)/Users in Single Tenant Mode Defining Sending Settings Defining System Settings Defining Customization Settings Defining SIEM Integration Defining Ticketing System Integration Settings Defining LDAP Targets About Automatic LDAP Target

13 Adding LDAP Target Manually Editing LDAP Target Deleting LDAP Target Defining Date & Time Format Defining Server Settings Settings Available for Tenant Admin Defining System Settings Defining Customization Settings Defining Date & Time Format Health Monitoring About System State Viewing System Errors and Notifications Critical Error Threshold Receiving Notifications on Error Events Server Resource Monitoring Downloading Log Files Offline Clients ( Lost ) Enabling Offline ( Lost ) Clients Detection Viewing Offline ( Lost ) Clients Viewing Monitoring Results Session List About Client Sessions List Filtering Sessions Filtering by Specific Parameters Searching in the Session Data Export Sessions Sorting Sessions Playing Sessions About Session Viewer Interface Session Player Magnifier Getting Data URL

14 Metadata Grid Player and Metadata Synchronization Filtering Data Sorting Data Live Sessions Windows Client Sessions Playing Windows Sessions Viewing Clipboard Text Data Viewing USB Device Info Viewing URLs Viewing Idle State macos Client Sessions Playing macos Sessions Viewing URLs Linux Client Sessions Playing Remote SSH Sessions Playing Local X Window System Sessions Filtering EXEC Commands Viewing Alerts About Alert Viewer Interface Using Alert Viewer Archived Sessions About Changing Investigated Database Viewing Archived Sessions Dashboards About Dashboard Types Licenses Clients Database Usage Storage Recent Alerts Latest Live Sessions Sessions out of Work Hours

15 Rarely Used Computers Rarely Used Logins CPU Usage Memory Usage Database State Customizing Dashboards Interactive Monitoring About Viewing Data Applications Monitoring Chart URL Monitoring Chart Forensic Export About Exporting Session Fragment Exporting Full Session Exporting Multiple Sessions Viewing Forensic Export History Playing Exported Session Validating Exported Data Troubleshooting Quick Access to Log Files Database/Server Database/Server Related Issues Database/Server Related Error Messages Management Tool Management Tool Related Issues Management Tool Error Messages Viewing Monitored Data Windows Client Checking that the Client Is Installed Clients Installation/Uninstallation Issues and Error Messages Possible Problems with Receiving Data from Clients Possible USB Monitoring Problems Linux Client Possible Problems with Receiving Data from Clients

16 Checking the State of the Linux Client Restarting Linux Client Appendix Default Alerts Fraud Activity Data Leakage Potentially Illicit Activity Not Work-related Activity Standard and Enterprise Edition Comparison Chart

17 About Welcome to Ekran System! Ekran System is an application that allows you to record the activity of the target computers with installed Clients and to view the screenshots from these computers in the form of video. 17

18 System Requirements Ekran System claims different system requirements for each of its components. Make sure your hardware and software meet the following system requirements to avoid possible component malfunctions. Server requirements: 2 GHz or higher CPU 4 GB or more RAM Enterprise-level Ethernet card Minimum 1 Gbit/s network adapter Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2008 R2 (x64 platform) Universal C Runtime and Visual C++ Runtime (starting with Ekran System 5.5). Both can be installed via the Microsoft Visual C Redistributable: NOTE: The Universal C Runtime needs to be initially installed via update KB : Framework or higher NOTE: If the Server and the Management Tool are to be installed on the same computer, make sure you turn on the Internet Information Service before the installation of.net Framework [When using MS SQL Database]: Full edition of MS SQL Server 2008R2 SP1 or higher. Standard license or higher is required. [When using PostgreSQL Database]: PostgreSQL 9.5 or higher. NOTE: If you want to deploy the Ekran System in the High Availability mode, enabled Message Queueing and configured NLB cluster are required. Please refer to the High Availability Deployment Guide for more information. Management Tool requirements: 2 GHz or higher CPU 4 GB or more RAM 100 Mbit/s network adapter Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7 (any edition except Home); [recommended] Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2008 R2 (starting from SP1 version). Both x86 and x64 platforms are supported..net Framework or higher IIS 7.5 or higher with enabled ASP.NET 3.5 and 4.5 support (4.6 for Windows Server 2016) 18

19 [For accessing the Management Tool locally or remotely] One of the following browsers: Google Chrome 37 or higher Mozilla Firefox 32 or higher Internet Explorer 10 or higher Safari S6 and Safari S5 Opera 15 or higher NOTE: The Management Tool might be opened in other browsers, but its compatibility with other browsers is not guaranteed. Windows Client requirements: 1 GHz or higher CPU 512 MB or more RAM 100 Mbit/s network adapter Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows XP SP3; Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2003 SP1. Both x86 and x64 platforms are supported. NOTE: Due to the new SHA-256 code signing, on Windows 7 SP1 and Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, the Microsoft Security Advisory update needs to be installed: Citrix XenDesktop; Citrix XenApp; Citrix XenDesktop/XenApp with Citrix Provisioning Services (PVS). It is recommended to have not less than 500MB of free space on the disk where the Client is installed to save data during the offline session. macos Client requirements: 2.26GHz Intel Core 2 Duo or higher CPU 2GB RAM 100 Mbit/s network adapter macos 10.9 and later It is recommended to have not less than 500MB of free space on the disk where the Client is installed to save data during the offline session. Linux Client requirements: 1 GHz or higher CPU 512 MB or more RAM 100 Mbit/s network adapter It is recommended to have not less than 500MB of free space on the disk where the Client is installed to save data during the offline session. Linux Kernel and higher 19

20 Distributor Base OS Versions Supported Debian Debian Ubuntu Linux Mint 9.0, 8.0, , 16.0, 15.0, 14.0, xx 13 opensuse Suse Linux Enterprise Server 12(SP1, SP2, SP3), 11(SP2, SP3, SP4) RedHat RedHat CentOS Oracle Linux 7.0, x, 6.x 7.x Sun Microsystems Solaris 10.0 (Global and Whole root zones only) IBM AIX 7.2, 7.1 NOTE: When the Client is installed to the terminal server, hardware requirements depend on the number of active user sessions and may increase drastically. For example, hardware requirements for the Client deployed on the terminal server hosting 10 active user sessions will be as follows: Intel Core i3 or similar AMD CPU 2048 MB RAM 20

21 Program Structure Ekran System is an application specially designed to control user activity remotely. Ekran System includes the following components: Ekran System Server (further referred to as Server): It is the main part of the Ekran System used for storing the screenshots and associated information received from the Clients. The work of the Server can be started or stopped via Server Tray. Ekran System Management Tool (further referred to as Management Tool): It is a central administrative unit that allows you to control and manage Clients, Users, USB Monitoring Rules, Alerts, Server database, and Serial Keys. You can have access to the Management Tool from any computer in the network without having to install it on this computer. Ekran System Session Viewer provides a usable interface for quick review of the monitored data received from the Ekran System Clients. Ekran System Windows Clients (further referred to as Windows Clients): Being hosted on the remote computers, Windows Clients create screenshots with the defined frequency and send them to the Server along with metadata information such as user name, host name, activity time, active window titles, application names, URL addresses, clipboard text data, keystrokes, etc. Managing the remote Windows Clients configuration and settings is performed via the Management Tool. Ekran System macos Clients (further referred to as macos Clients): Being hosted on the remote computers, macos Clients create screenshots with the defined frequency and send them to the Server along with metadata information such as user name, host name, activity time, active window titles, application names, URL addresses, etc. Managing the remote macos Clients configuration and settings is performed via the Management Tool. Ekran System Linux/Unix Clients (further referred to as Linux Clients): Being hosted on the remote computers, Linux Clients capture input/output terminal data (including all executed commands) and send this interactive data to the Server. Ekran System Tray Notifications application (further referred to as Tray Notifications application): This application allows receiving notifications on alert events on Clients. 21

22 22

23 Getting Started Deployment Process The Ekran System installation consists of several steps: 1. Installing the Server: To deploy the system, first of all you need to install the Server. The Server is used to store and process all records sent by the Clients hosted on the remote computers. During the Server installation you can select the type of the database and define administrator credentials. NOTE: You can deploy the Ekran System in the High Availability mode, which allows you to work with multiple Server instances in the Network Load Balancer cluster. This would provide a high level of operational performance, which allows minimizing downtime and service interruptions. Please refer to the High Availability Deployment Guide for more information. 2. Completing Management Tool installation prerequisites: To install and run the Management Tool, you need to turn on the Internet Information Service on your computer, add the selfsigned or trusted certificate to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities and set HTTPS binding for a default web site (or any other IIS site). 3. Installing the Management Tool: The Management Tool is used to manage Users, Clients, Alerts, and Database, as well as to view the monitored data received from Clients. Connection with the Server is required for the Management Tool to operate. 4. Activating serial keys (adding activated serial keys): To be able to receive data from the Clients, you need to license the Clients by activating purchased serial keys. You can also activate an Enterprise serial key to get an access to the enterprise features of the Ekran System during the unlimited period of time. 5. Installing Clients: Installing Windows Clients: The Windows Clients are usually installed remotely via the Management Tool. A Windows Client can be installed on any computer in the network. Please note that several conditions have to be met for successful remote Client installation. Installing macos Clients: The macos Clients are installed locally. Installing Linux Clients: The Linux Clients are installed locally. 6. Installing the Tray Notifications application: The Tray Notifications application can be installed on any computer and as long as there is connection to the Server; the Tray Notifications application displays notifications on all alert events received from Clients. For more information, see the Tray Notifications application help file. After installing all the system components, Ekran System is considered deployed and all its features become available. 23

24 Working with Application The work with the application includes the following options: 1. Assigning licenses to the Clients: An available license is automatically assigned to the Client (both Windows and Linux) during its first connection to the Server. If the license hasn t been assigned to the Client, you need to assign it manually. 2. Adding Client Groups: Client Groups allow you to grant access to several Clients at the same time to your users without the necessity to grant them access to all the Clients. 3. Adding Users/User Groups and defining their permissions: To allow others to work with the Management Tool, you can create new users and define their permissions in the Management Tool. 4. Defining Client configuration and Client Group Configuration. 5. Managing Alerts: Alerts are used to notify the investigators of a specific activity (potentially harmful/forbidden actions) on the target computers with installed Clients. You can create, assign, import, and export alerts. When the Ekran System is installed, it has a list of predefined alerts. 6. Creating USB blocking rules: Kernel-level USB Monitoring allows you to detect that the USB device is plugged into the computer on which the Windows Client is installed. You can view information on the detected devices, receive notifications or block USB devices. 7. Viewing monitoring results in the Management Tool: The monitored data received from the Client computer can be viewed in the Session Viewer part of the Management Tool. 8. Exporting sessions from the Session Viewer: You can export sessions in the encrypted form to view Client sessions on any computer, even without access to the Management Tool. 9. Receiving Alert notifications: The notifications on the alert events are received via the Tray Notifications application. The notifications are displayed in the Windows notification area. 10. Generating reports: The user activity can be analysed with the help of reports generated via the Management Tool. You can schedule the reports to be generated and sent via at the specified time or generate the reports manually via Report Generator. 11. Interactive Monitoring: The user activity can be analysed with the help of the statistic data you can generate using Interactive Monitoring. You can get detailed information on the total time that has been spent in each application/on each website. 12. Managing database: Not to run out of space on the Server computer, it is recommended to cleanup or archive and cleanup the database periodically deleting old monitored data. You can enable the database archiving and cleanup and then access the archived data any time via the Management Tool. In addition, you can remove unnecessary uninstalled Clients from the database. 24

25 Server and Database About The Server is the main component of the system, which provides interaction between other components. The Server stores all monitored data, user accounts, and system settings in the database. Database Types Comparison When installing the Server, you can choose between three types of databases (MS SQL database, Firebird database, and PostgreSQL database). These databases have the following differences: Feature MS SQL Database Firebird Database PostgreSQL Database General Commercial/ open-source Commercial database from Microsoft Open source product Open source product Free (has a limited free version) NOTE: Using MS SQL Express does not guarantee the stable work of the Server. Requires additional software installation Scalability Remote access to database (a separate database engine that can be deployed on a separate server) (an embedded database that runs inside of the Ekran System server process and cannot be moved to another server) (a separate database engine that can be deployed on a separate server) Clustering support (Primary-Standby) 25

26 Feature MS SQL Database Firebird Database PostgreSQL Database Network drives support (if mount as drive) Performance Processing speed Efficient caching algorithms Index statistics update High Low High Automatic Manual Manual Memory/proc ess usage A separate process, more efficient memory usage, quotas can be applied Uses memory and CPU as a part of the Ekran System server process A separate process, more efficient memory usage, quotas can be applied Additional features o Maintenance tasks can be executed by the engine independently o Complex execution plans optimizations o Cross-platform. It can be run on variety of systems and platforms (Windows, Linux, macos, BSD, Solaris) o A lot of third-party solutions for replications and clustering Requires additional software installation Safety and security Security High. Keystroke encryption is supported Low. Keystroke encryption is not supported High. Keystroke encryption is supported 26

27 Feature MS SQL Database Firebird Database PostgreSQL Database Safety o Database corruption is unlikely o Replications o Сan be managed via Microsoft native tools o Support scheduled maintenance: reindexing, shrinking etc. o Database corruption is possible o No replications o Only automatic database maintenance supported o Database corruption is unlikely o Replications Backup Flexible backup logic (to learn more about the MS SQL database backup, visit the Microsoft website at m/en-us/sql/relationaldatabases/backuprestore/full-databasebackups-sqlserver?view=sql-server ) Manual backup with service stopping (to learn more about the Firebird database backup, visit the Firebird website at rg/pdfmanual/html/nbac kup-backups.html ) Flexible backup logic (to learn more about the PostgreSQL database backup, visit the PostgreSQL website at g/docs/9.1/static/backup. html ) High Availability Mode About The High Availability mode allows you to configure and deploy Ekran System in such a way that it can work with multiple Server instances in the Network Load Balancer cluster. This would allow balancing the load of data sent to the servers by Ekran Clients and ensure data integrity in case any of the instances goes offline for any number of reasons. NOTE: The High Availability mode is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. 27

28 Standard and High Availability Modes Comparison The Standard and High Availability modes have the following differences: Feature Standard Mode High Availability Mode Serial key types Database type One of the following serial keys: Permanent Trial Update and support Firebird, MS SQL or PostgreSQL Enterprise serial key and one of the following keys: MS SQL Permanent Trial Update and support Number of Servers One Multiple System requirements Standard system requirements. Standard system requirements, enabled Message Queueing, and configured NLB cluster. Additional Software None NLB cluster NOTE: We recommend using Windows NLB. We cannot guarantee the High Availability Mode to function with other load balancers correctly. Component connection Recommended for Physical IP address Average number of Client computers Logical IP address Large number of Client computers Installing Remote PostgreSQL Database Server When using the remote PostgreSQL database server, you need to open the ports to ensure the connection between the Ekran Server and PostgreSQL database. To install the remote PostgreSQL database server, do the following: 1. Download PostgreSQL 9.5 or higher. You can download it from the PostgreSQL official website at 28

29 2. Run the installation file on the computer. 3. On the machine with the installed PostgreSQL database, navigate to the folder with the postgresql.conf file. By default, C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\<version number>\data. 4. Open the postgresql.conf file. 5. In the postgresql.conf file, define the listen_addresses parameter as * or type the external IP address. 6. Save the changes. 7. In the same folder, open the pg_hba.conf file. 8. To allow non-local connections, add the host record in the IPv4 local connections group: Type: host Database: all User: all Address: IP address of the Ekran Server/subnet mask. Please note, if you use NAT in your network, you should define the external IP address. Method: md5 9. Save the changes. 10. Restart the PostgreSQL service. 11. On the Ekran Server and PostgreSQL machines, in the Windows Firewall, allow the TCP connection to port Installing/Uninstalling/Updating the Server Installing the Server To install the Server, do the following: 1. Run the EkranSystem_Server.exe installation file. 2. Click Next on the Welcome page. 3. Carefully read the terms of the End-User License Agreement and click I Agree. 4. On the Choose Components page, do one of the following and click Next: In the drop-down list, select Ekran System Server. Select Ekran System Server in the box. 5. On the Choose Install Location page, enter the installation path or click Browse to navigate to the Server installation folder. Click Next. 6. On the Database Type page, select the type of the database you want to use for storing data. Click Next. For more information see the Database Types Comparison chapter. 7. If you have selected MS SQL Server, on the MS SQL Server Database Configuration page, define the connection parameters and then click Next. Define the MS SQL Server instance name, which is the instance name assigned to the TCP/IP port. Optionally, you can define the custom MS SQL database 29

30 port by entering it after the Server instance name and separating with comma (e.g.,<server_instance_name>,<port>). NOTE: If the default instance of the MS SQL is used, then only name of the PC with the MS SQL server must be defined. Define the Database name for the database. Define the User name and Password of a user account via which the connection to the Server will be established. NOTE: You have to define either the SA credentials or the credentials of the user with the dbcreator permission. 8. If you have selected Firebird database, on the Database Location page, enter the database path or click Browse to navigate to the database installation folder. Click Next. 9. If you have selected PostgreSQL, on the PostgreSQL Server Database Configuration page, define the connection parameters and then click Next. Define the PostgreSQL Server instance name, which is the instance name assigned to the TCP/IP port. Optionally, you can define the custom PostgreSQL database port by entering it after the Server instance name and separating with colon (e.g.,<server_instance_name>:<port>). NOTE: If the default instance of the PostgreSQL is used, enter localhost in the Server instance field. Define the Database name for the database. Define the User name and Password of a user account via which the connection to the Server will be established. NOTE: By default, it is a user with the login postgres and the password defined during the PostgreSQL installation. 10. If you already have a database created during the usage of previous program versions, you will be offered to re-use it. If you want to use the existing database, click Yes. In other case, click No and the new database will be created. NOTE: If you click No, the existing database will be deleted. 11. On the Administrator password page, define the password for the administrator (the default user of Ekran System with login admin and full permissions). Click Next. 12. On the Client Uninstallation Key page, enter the key that will be used during the Client local uninstallation and click Next. By default, the Uninstallation key is allowed. You will be able to change this key via the Management Tool any time later. 13. Click Install. 14. The installation process starts. Its progress is displayed on the Installing page. 15. After the end of the installation process, click Finish to exit the wizard. 16. If you are installing the Server for the first time, back up EkranMasterCertificate. The backed up certificate might be required for Server recovery or during updates. 17. If you already have a backed up master certificate and are re-using the database, delete the master certificate and import the backed up one instead of it. 30

31 18. In Windows Firewall, you must allow the Server executable to accept TCP connections via ports 9447 (for the connection between the Server and the Clients), 22712, 22713, and (for the connection between the Server and the Management Tool). These rules will be added to Windows Firewall automatically if Windows Firewall is enabled during the Server installation. Backing up Ekran Master Certificate To back up Ekran Master Certificate, do the following: 1. On the Ekran Server computer with the certificate you want to back up, press Windows+R, type mmc in the Run text box and press Enter. 2. In the opened User Account Control window, click Yes. 3. In the Console window, select File > Add/Remove Snap-in. 4. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, select Certificates and click Add. 31

32 5. In the Certificates Snap-in window, select the Computer account option and click Next. 6. In the Select Computer window, select the Local computer option and click Finish. 32

33 7. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, click OK. 8. In the Certificates (Local computer) tree-view, select Personal > Certificates. 9. Select EkranMasterCertificate and in its context menu select All Tasks > Export. 10. The Certificate Export Wizard opens. 11. On the Certificate Export Wizard Welcome page, click Next. 12. On the Export Private Key page, select the Yes, export the private key option and click Next. 13. On the Export File Format page, select the following options : Personal Information Exchange Include all certificates in the certification path if possible Export all extended properties 14. Click Next. 33

34 15. On the Security page, select the Password option and enter the password in the Password and the Confirm password fields. Click Next. NOTE: Make sure that you remember the password since you will need it when restoring the certificate or transferring it to another server. 16. On the File to Export page, specify the location to store the certificate and the certificate name manually or click Browse, and click Next. 17. On the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard page, click Finish. NOTE: You will need the certificate for reinstalling the Server, moving it to another computer, or creating the High Availability cluster. 34

35 Deleting Ekran Master Certificate To delete Ekran Master Certificate, do the following: 1. On the Ekran Server computer, press Windows+R, type mmc in the Run text box and press Enter. 2. In the opened User Account Control window, click Yes. 3. In the Console window, select File > Add/Remove Snap-in. 4. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, select Certificates and click Add. 5. In the Certificates Snap-in window, select the Computer account option and click Next. 6. In the Select Computer window, select the Local computer option and click Finish. 7. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, click OK. 8. In the Certificates (Local computer) tree-view, select Personal > Certificates. 9. Select EkranMasterCertificate and in its context menu select Delete. 10. Click Yes in the confirmation message. Importing Ekran Master Certificate To import Ekran Master Certificate, do the following: 1. On the Ekran Server computer, press Windows+R, type mmc in the Run text box and press Enter. 2. In the opened User Account Control window, click Yes. 3. In the Console window, select File > Add/Remove Snap-in. 4. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, select Certificates and click Add. 5. In the Certificates Snap-in window, select the Computer account option and click Next. 6. In the Select Computer window, select the Local computer option and click Finish. 7. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, click OK. 8. In the Certificates (Local computer) tree-view, select Personal > Certificates. 9. In the Console window, select Actions > All Tasks > Import. 10. The Certificate Import Wizard opens. 11. On the Certificate Import Wizard Welcome page, click Next. 12. On the File to Import page, click Browse and select the file with the backed up certificate. Click Next. 13. On the Private key protection page, enter the password and click Next. 14. On the Certificate Store page, select the Place all certificates in the following folder option, click Browse, and select the Personal node. Click Next. 15. On the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard page, click Finish. 35

36 Installing the Server in the Cloud To install the server in the cloud, do the following: 1. In the cloud, install the Server in a usual way. 2. In the cloud management console, allow the Server executable to accept TCP connections via ports 9447 (for the connection between the Server and the Clients), 22712, 22713, and (for the connection between the Server and the Management Tool). NOTE: It is recommended to install the Server and Management Tool on the same computer. Adding Server Executable to Windows Firewall Please note that Windows Firewall will be adjusted automatically if it is enabled during the Server installation. If you use any other Firewall, it should be adjusted as well. To add the Server executable to the Windows Firewall, do the following: 1. In the Control Panel, select System and Security > Windows Firewall. 2. In the Windows Firewall window, click Advanced settings. 3. In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window, right-click Inbound Rules and select New rule. 36

37 4. The New Inbound Rule Wizard opens. 5. On the Rule Type page, select Program and click Next. 6. On the Program page, select This program path, then click Browse and navigate to the Server executable. The default path is "C:\Program Files\Ekran System\Ekran System\Server\EkranServer.exe ". Click Next. 7. On the Action page, select Allow the connection and then click Next. 37

38 8. On the Profile page, select the profile of the network used for connecting remote computers and the Server. Click Next. 9. On the Name page, define the Name of the rule. Click Finish. 10. The rule is created for the Server application. By default, the rule allows any connections via all ports. 11. To define the protocol and ports, double-click the created rule. The Properties window opens. 12. In the Protocols and Ports tab, do the following: In the Protocol Type list, select TCP. 38

39 In the Local port list, select Specific Ports. Type the following port numbers in the box below: o 9447 (for the connection between the Server and the Clients) o and (for the connection between the Server and the Management Tool) o (for the connection between the Server and the Tray Notification Application) 13. Click Apply to save changes. Click OK. 14. Close the Windows Firewall window. Using an External/Cloud-Based Server Computer If your Server is not in the same network as Clients or the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Make sure your Server has a unique external IP address. 2. Specify this address when installing the Management Tool and installing the Client. Updating the Server The updating of the Server is performed via the installation file of a newer version. During an update you may select to update the existing database to a newer version or simply reinstall it. To update the Server, do the following: 1. Run the EkranSystem_Server.exe installation file. 2. On the Welcome page, click Next. 3. On the Already Installed page, select Update/Add/Remove components and click Next. 4. On the Choose Components page, select Ekran System Server in the box and then click Next. 5. On the Database Update page, if you want to keep the existing database, select Update database to a new version, otherwise select Reinstall the database. Click Next. NOTE: To change the type of the database, you need to reinstall the whole system. 6. On the Administrator password page, define the password for the administrator (the default user of Ekran System with login admin and full permissions). Click Next. 7. The update process starts. 8. After the end of the update process, click Finish to exit the wizard. 9. If you are updating Server from version lower than 5.5, back up EkranMasterCertificate. 10. If you are updating Server from version 5.5 and higher, make sure that the master certificate is correct. If necessary, import it from the backed up copy. 39

40 Uninstalling the Server NOTE: Before uninstalling the Server, make sure you have uninstalled all the Clients from the remote computers. If you do not uninstall the Clients, they will remain installed on the remote computers and collect the data locally. It will be impossible to remove them in a common way. To uninstall the Server from the local computer, do the following: 1. Run the EkranSystem_Server.exe installation file or click Uninstall/Change on the Ekran System application in the Programs and Features window of the Windows Control Panel. 2. The setup wizard opens. 3. Click Next on the Welcome page. 4. On the Already Installed page, select Uninstall and click Next. 5. On the Uninstall Ekran System page, click Uninstall. 6. If you want to delete the database, click Yes in the confirmation message. In other case, click No and you will be able to use the saved database during the next installation of the program. 7. Wait for the uninstallation process to complete. Changing Server Port for Client Connection Ekran System allows you to define the Ekran Server port via which the Clients connect to the Server. By default, it is set to 9447 To define the custom port, change the PortSecure value in the Server registry (HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Ekran System), and then define the same value in the RemotePort parameter. Server Tray The Server Tray application informs you about the Server state. This application is installed on the computer where the Server is installed. It also automatically restarts the Server in case of its failure. The first three times the restart is performed automatically. The user is informed about the Server failure in the notification area. If the Server fails for the fourth time, it does not restart. You can start/stop the Server or hide the icon from the notification area. 40

41 Database Management About Database management is performed via the Management Tool by the user with the administrative Database management permission. During the database management process you can delete monitoring data, delete offline or uninstalled Clients, shrink the database depending on its type. Two types of the cleanup operation are available: Cleanup: Allows deleting monitored data collected by the Clients from the database. Archiving & Cleanup: Allows saving the monitored data in the secure storage and then deleting it from the database. You can view the archived sessions in the Session Viewer any time. NOTE: The Archiving & Cleanup option is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. You can configure the cleanup execution frequency as follows: Once: The one-time cleanup operation will be performed by click on Save. On schedule: The scheduled cleanup operation will be performed every few days at a specified time. Cleanup Parameters The following parameters are available for cleanup operation: Parameter Description Parameters applied to both Cleanup and Archiving & Cleanup operations Sessions older than (days) Sessions stored in the database longer than the defined period of time will be deleted during the cleanup process. Client exceptions The Clients whose monitoring data will not be deleted during the cleanup process. They are added on the Adding Exceptions page. Parameters applied to the Archiving & Cleanup operation for Firebird database type Archive database location Binary data location The location of the database. NOTE: If you do not have an archive database, it will be created on Archiving & Cleanup start. In case the binary data is stored separately, you have to define the binary data folder location. 41

42 Parameter Description Parameters applied to the Archiving & Cleanup operation for MS SQL database type SQL server instance The path to the SQL server instance. Archive database name User name and Password The name of the database. NOTE: If you do not have an archive database, it will be created on Archiving & Cleanup start. Credentials of the user with access to the database. Parameters applied to the Archiving & Cleanup operation for PostgreSQL database type PostgreSQL server instance Archive database name User name and Password The path to the PostgreSQL server instance. The name of the database. Credentials of the user with access to the database. One-Time Cleanup To delete data from the Server once, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Database Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Database Management page, select the Archiving & Cleanup Options tab. 4. In the Frequency section, select the Run once option. 5. On the Archiving & Cleanup Options tab, in the Settings section, in the Action type dropdown list, select the Cleanup option to delete the monitored data from the database or the Archive & Cleanup option to archive and then delete the monitored data. 6. Define the necessary parameters. NOTE: To check connection with the archive database before Archiving & Cleanup start, click Test Database Connection in the Archive parameters section. 7. To select the Clients whose monitoring data will not be deleted during the cleanup process, click Add Exceptions. 42

43 8. On the Adding Exceptions page, select the necessary Clients and then click Add selected. Use filters to find a specific Client. 9. When all cleanup settings are defined, click Save. 10. The cleanup process starts. Scheduled Cleanup To delete data from the Server on schedule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Database Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Database Management page, select the Archiving & Cleanup Options tab. 4. In the Frequency section, select the Repeat by scheduler option. 5. Define the following options: Perform every (days): The frequency of the cleanup operation. Start database cleanup at: The time to execute the cleanup operation. 6. On the Archiving & Cleanup Options tab, in the Settings section, in the Action type dropdown list, select the Cleanup option to delete the monitored data from the database or the Archive & Cleanup option to archive and then delete the monitored data. 7. Define the necessary parameters. NOTE: To check connection with the archive database, click Test Database Connection in the Archive parameters section. 8. To select the Clients whose monitoring data will not be deleted during scheduled cleanup process, click Add Exceptions. 9. On the Adding Exceptions page, select the necessary Clients and then click Add selected. Use filters to find a specific Client. 10. When all cleanup settings are defined, click Save. Shrinking MS SQL Database The database shrinking feature allows you to shrink the size of the MS SQL database to the actual amount of the data stored in it by cutting the space reserved by the database, but which is not used by it. NOTE: The database shrinking procedure may take some time (up to several hours) and cause performance slowdown. To shrink a database, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Database Management navigation link to the left. 43

44 3. On the Database Management page, select the Database Options tab. 4. On the Database Options tab, click Shrink database. NOTE: The progress of the database shrinking process is not displayed in the Management Tool and there is no indication of the process finishing. Autovacuuming PostgreSQL Database The PostgreSQL database requires periodic maintenance known as vacuuming. The Autovacuum Daemon is an optional feature that automatically vacuums the PostgreSQL. It is made up of multiple processes that reclaim storage by removing obsolete data or tuples from the database. The Autovacuum Daemon is enabled in the default configuration. The default Autovacuum settings for PostgreSQL can be found in the postgresql.conf file and control when and how the Autovacuum Daemon runs. To edit the Autovacuum settings for the PostgreSQL database, find and edit the settings stored within the postgresql.conf file. The location of the postgresql.conf file will vary depending on the operating system. Please note, once you have edited the settings within the postgresql.conf file, you will need to restart the PostgreSQL database. Firebird Database Optimization When using the Firebird database, it is recommended to perform the Update statistics procedure at least every two months in order to optimize the database and increase the speed of reports generation. To perform the Update statistics procedure, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Database Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Database Management page, select the Database Options tab. 4. On the Database Options tab, click Update statistics. Deleting the Client To delete the Client means to delete it completely from the database with cleaning up all its captured sessions. After this, the Client disappears from the Management Tool and its captured data is not displayed in the Session Viewer. NOTE: When the Client is deleted, all records about generated one-time passwords for this Client are deleted. 44

45 It is possible to delete only offline or uninstalled (both after local or remote uninstallation) Clients. If after deletion the Client connects to the Server again, it will appear in the Management Tool but its deleted data will be unavailable. To delete one offline/uninstalled Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the needed offline or uninstalled Client from the list and click Edit Client. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, click Delete Client. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 6. The Client is deleted. To delete several offline/uninstalled Clients, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Delete Clients. 4. On the Client Deletion page, click Add Clients to list. 5. The Client Deletion from Database page opens. It contains all Clients that can be deleted. NOTE: Only offline and uninstalled Clients are displayed in the list. 45

46 6. Select the needed Clients from the list and then click Next. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 7. When all Clients are selected, click Delete on the Client Deletion from Database page. 8. The Clients are deleted from the Server (with all captured sessions) and disappear from the Management Tool. Moving the Server Database About Ekran System allows you to move the Server database either to another computer or to another location on the same computer. Moving the Server Database on the Same Computer To change the location for the MS SQL Server Database, do the following: 1. Stop the Server by clicking Stop in the context menu of the Server icon in the notification area or find the EkranServer service in the Task Manager and click Stop. 2. Log in to the SQL Management Studio as a user with administrative permissions. 3. In the SQL Management Studio, detach the Ekran databases (select the database and in its context menu, select Task > Detach). Default names of the databases are EkranActivityDB and EKRANManagementDatabase. 4. Navigate to the location where the Ekran databases are stored. The default location is C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL11.MSSQLSERVER\MSSQL\DATA. 5. Move the following files to another location: EkranAlphaActivityDB, EKRANManagementDatabase, EkranAlphaActivityDB_log, and EKRANManagementDatabase_log. 6. In the SQL Management Studio, reattach the Ekran databases as follows: In the context menu of the Database partition, click Attach. In the opened Attach Databases window, click Add and select the moved database. Click OK. 46

47 7. The Database location is changed. Start the EkranServer service to continue working with the program. To change the location for the Server Firebird database, do the following: 1. Stop the Server by clicking Stop in the context menu of the Server icon in the notification area or find the EkranServer service in the Task Manager and click Stop. 2. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 3. In the Registry Editor window, select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem key. 4. Find the Database values (Database and ManagedDatabase) and see where the Database files are located on your computer. 5. Move the folder with database files to a new location. NOTE: The folder contains the EKRANACTIVITYDB.FDB and MANAGEMENTDATABASE.FDB files and the Cache subfolder (unless your Cache subfolder is stored in the shared folder). 47

48 6. In the Registry Editor window, modify the following values: Database: Enter the full path to the EkranActivityDB.fdb file (including the file name) in its new location and then click OK. Managed Database: Enter the path to the folder with Ekran database in its new location and then click OK. 7. The Database location is changed. Start the EkranServer service to continue working with the program. 48

49 Moving the Server Database to Another Computer To move the MS SQL Server Database to another computer, do the following: 1. Stop the Server by clicking Stop in the context menu of the Server icon in the notification area or find the EkranServer service in the Task Manager and click Stop. 2. Log in to the SQL Management Studio as a user with administrative permissions. 3. In the SQL Management Studio, detach the Ekran databases (select the database and in its context menu, select Task > Detach). Default names of the databases are EkranActivityDB and EKRANManagementDatabase. 4. Navigate to the location where the Ekran databases are stored. The default location is C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL11.MSSQLSERVER\MSSQL\DATA. 5. Copy the following database and log files: EkranAlphaActivityDB, EKRANManagementDatabase, EkranAlphaActivityDB_log, and EKRANManagementDatabase_log. NOTE: If the binary data is stored in the shared or local folder, you have to copy it too. 6. Upload the copied files to a suitable location on the new computer with the SQL Server. 7. On the computer the MS SQL database is moved to, log in to the SQL Management Studio as a user with the administrative permissions and attach the Ekran databases as follows: In the context menu of the Database partition, click Attach. In the opened Attach Databases window, click Add and select the uploaded database. Click OK. 8. Uninstall the Server on the original computer. 9. Install the Server: If you are reinstalling the Server on the original computer, select the MS SQL database, configure the connection to the moved database, and confirm its usage. If you are installing the Server on the computer with the moved database, do the following: - Copy the certificates from the Server installation folder on the original computer. - Reinstall all Clients. 49

50 - Contact the support team at to change the HWID associated with your serial keys to a new one. 10. The Database location is changed. Start the EkranServer service to continue working with the program. Moving Binary Data to Shared or Local Folder If necessary, you can store binary data received from Clients in the shared or local folder on your computer. This might be necessary for storing large amounts of data. This feature has the following limitations: Shared Folders on mapped and mounted disks cannot be used for storing binary data. After you select to store binary data in the shared folder instead of MS SQL database, the already existing screenshots will no longer be displayed (only metadata will be available for them). The newly received screenshots will be displayed. To move binary data to the shared folder, do the following: 1. Stop the Server by clicking Stop in the context menu of the Server icon in the notification area or find the EkranServer service in the Task Manager and click Stop. 2. For the Firebird database, do the following (for the MS SQL database, skip this step): Open the Windows Registry Editor. In the Registry Editor window, select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem key. Find the Database value and check where the Database files are located on your computer. Move the Cache folder with binary file to a new location. 3. In the Registry Editor window, click Edit > New > String value and add a new value: Value type: String Value name: StorageDirectory Value data: Shared Folder location as \\<computer IP>\<folder path> or \\<computer name>\<folder path> 4. To access binary data in the shared folder on a different computer from your Server, it is recommended to do the following: Open Computer Management. In the Computer Management window, open Services and Applications > Services. In the Services pane, find the EkranServer service and select Properties in the context menu. In the EkranServer Properties window navigate to the Log On tab. In the Log On tab, select the This account option, specify the credentials for the EkranServer service to start under, and click Apply. Make sure the user with the 50

51 specified credentials has administrator permissions on your Server computer and full access to the shared folder on the different computer. Restart the service. 5. Start the EkranServer service to continue working with the program. Validating Monitoring Data About If necessary, you can enable the validation of monitoring data of Windows Clients, which allows checking that data integrity in the database has not been altered. It can be enabled for Firebird, MS SQL, and PostgreSQL databases. Two types of monitoring data validation are available: Calculating hash codes for monitoring data: in this case, the hash codes will be calculated for each screenshot and metadata record received from Windows Clients. Signing monitoring data with certificate: in this case, each screenshot and metadata record received from Windows Clients will be signed with the trusted certificate. NOTE: If both types of validation are enabled, only signing monitoring data with certificate will be used. After validation of monitoring data is enabled or validation type is changed, all previously recorded sessions of Windows Clients will be considered as invalid. With enabled validation of the monitoring data, the integrity of monitoring data within a Windows Client session is checked on the session opening via the Session Player. If some screenshots or metadata records have been deleted or modified, the warning message Session data is not valid! will be displayed in the Session Player. NOTE: When the validation of monitoring data is enabled, the CPU usage will rise while viewing the Client sessions in the Session Player. 51

52 NOTE: After the enabling validation of monitoring data, for existing sessions, that were not viewed before, screenshots will not be shown. Validating Monitoring Data Using Hash Codes To enable calculating of hash codes for monitoring data, do the following: 1. Stop the Server by clicking Stop in the context menu of the Server icon in the notification area or find the EkranServer service in the Task Manager and click Stop. 2. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 3. In the Registry Editor window, select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem key. 4. Select Edit > New > DWORD (32-bit) Value and define the following: Value name: SignMonitoredData Value data: 1 5. Start the EkranServer service to continue working with the program. Signing Monitoring Data with Certificate To enable signing of monitoring data with certificate, you have to do the following on the Ekran Server computer: Step 1. Import the trusted purchased certificate or the self-signed one. Step 2. Create a special string value in the Windows Registry. Step 1. Importing Trusted Certificate 1. On the Ekran Server computer, press Windows+R, type mmc in the Run text box and press Enter. 2. In the opened User Account Control window, click Yes. 3. In the Console window, select File > Add/Remove Snap-in. 52

53 4. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, select Certificates and click Add. 5. In the Certificates Snap-in window, select the Computer account option and click Next. 6. In the Select Computer window, select the Local computer: (the computer this console is running on) option and click Finish. 7. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, click OK. 8. In the Certificates (Local computer) tree-view, find the Personal node. 9. In the context menu of the Personal node, select All Tasks > Import. 10. The Certificate Import Wizard opens. 53

54 11. On the Certificate Import Wizard Welcome page, click Next. 12. On the File to Import page, specify the location and name of the certificate to be imported manually or click Browse, and then click Next. 13. If required, on the Private key protection page, enter the password for the private key and then click Next. 14. On the Certificate Store page, click Next. 54

55 15. On the last page of the Certificate Import Wizard, click Finish, and then click OK in the confirmation message. 16. Select Certificates (Local Computer) > Personal > Certificate and double-click the imported certificate. 17. In the Certificate window, select Details > Thumbprint and then copy the Thumbprint value. 55

56 Step 2. Enabling Monitoring Data Signing with Certificate 1. Stop the Server by clicking Stop in the context menu of the Server icon in the notification area or find the EkranServer service in the Task Manager and click Stop. 2. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 3. In the Registry Editor window, select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem key. 4. Select Edit > New > String Value > and add a new value: Value name: SignMonitoredDataCert Value data: <copied Thumbprint value of the imported certificate (without spaces)> 5. Start the EkranServer service to continue working with the program. Moving the Server Database Signed with Certificate to another Computer About If you want to move the Ekran database whose monitoring data is signed with certificate to the new computer, you have to do the following: Step 1. On the Ekran Server computer, export the certificate used for signing the monitoring data, copy it to the new computer, and then import it. Step 2. Move the database to the new computer. Step 3. Install the Ekran Server on the new computer and then enable signing of monitoring data with imported certificate. Exporting Trusted Certificate 1. On the Ekran Server computer, press Windows+R, type mmc in the Run text box and press Enter. 2. In the opened User Account Control window, click Yes. 3. In the Console window, select File > Add/Remove Snap-in. 56

57 4. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, select Certificates and click Add. 5. In the Certificates Snap-in window, select the Computer account option and click Next. 6. In the Select Computer window, select the Local computer: (the computer this console is running on) option and click Finish. 7. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, click OK. 8. In the Certificates (Local computer) tree-view, select Personal > Certificates. 9. Select the trusted certificate used for signing the monitoring data in the database and in its context menu select All Tasks > Export. 57

58 10. The Certificate Export Wizard opens. 11. On the Certificate Export Wizard Welcome page, click Next. 12. On the Export Private Key page, click Next. 13. On the Export File Format page, select the file format for the certificate and click Next. 14. On the File to Export page, specify the location to store the certificate and the certificate name manually or click Browse, and then click Next. 58

59 15. On the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard page, click Finish. 16. Copy the exported certificate to a suitable location on the new computer and then import it. Deleting PostgreSQL Database If the PostgreSQL database was not deleted during the Server uninstallation, you need to delete it manually. Only the owner of the database, or a superuser, can delete a database. Please note, that the destruction of a database cannot be undone. To delete the PostgreSQL database, do the following: 1. Restart the PostgreSQL server. 2. Start pgadmin. 3. In the Browser pane, select the database you want to delete. By default, the databases used by Ekran System are ekranactivitydb and ekranmanagementdatabase. 4. Right-click and select Delete/Drop. 5. Click OK in the confirmation window. Isolating Database from Clients Ekran System allows you to disconnect all Clients from the database and stop receiving the information about their activity, which helps to fix issues with the database, run database cleanup and maintenance. 59

60 Isolating database from Cients is available for the users of the Administrators user group in the Single-tenant mode and for the users of the default tenant in the Multi-tenant mode. NOTE: The Isolating Database from Clients option is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. To enable the isolation mode, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left, click next to the System state tab and select Isolate database from Clients in the menu. During the isolation mode, all Clients are working in the offline mode and writing monitoring data to a local cache. To disable the isolation mode, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left, click next to the System state tab and select Stop isolating database from Clients in the menu or click here hyperlink in the orange notification pane at the top of the page. NOTE: In the case of long database isolation, as soon as the database work is restored, the network load will increase because all Clients will be sending their offline data. Advanced SIEM Integration About Advanced SIEM integration provides the ability to create a separate log file in one the following formats: - Common Event Format (CEF): can be viewed and analysed by the Splunk or ArcSight monitoring software - Log Event Extended Format (LEEF): can be viewed and analysed by the IBM QRadar monitoring software When SIEM integration is enabled, the log file will be created on the Ekran Server computer. By default, the log file name is EventLog and it is stored in the Server installation folder. NOTE: The Advanced SIEM Integration functionality is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. Log File Contents Depending on the defined log settings, different types of monitoring data can be written to the log file. CEF header information LEEF header information Log data Client events Device Event Class ID = 100 EventID = 100 Cat = ClientEvents Windows Client events: username (with the secondary username), Client name, activity time, activity title, application name, URL, 60

61 Name = EkranClientEvent cat = ClientEvents Alert events Device Event Class ID = 200 Name = EkranAlertEvent cat = AlertEvents Management Tool Log Events EventID = 200 Cat = AlertEvents keystrokes, alert/usb Rule, Session Player URL, OS, domain name, IPv4, IPv6, remote IP. Linux Client events: username, Client name, activity time, command, function, parameters, alert, Session Player URL, OS, IPv4, IPv6. Windows Client alert events: alert ID, alert name, alert description, username (with the secondary username), Client name, activity time, activity title, application name, URL, keystrokes, Session Player URL, OS, domain name, IPv4, IPv6, remote IP. Linux Client alert events: alert ID, alert name, alert description, username, Client name, activity time, command, function, parameters, Session Player URL, OS, IPv4, IPv6. Device Event Class ID = 300 Name = EkranMTLogEvent cat = MTLogEvents EventID = 300 Cat = MTLogEvents Management Log entry ID, time, Ekran System username, user groups, category, action, object, details. Enabling Log File Creation To enable the creation of a log file, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the SIEM Integration tab. 3. Select the Create a log file option to enable creating a log file. 4. Select the log file format: CEF log or LEEF log. 5. Define the log settings. 6. Click Save. 61

62 Log Cleanup Depending on the defined log cleanup settings, the cleanup operation can be performed either daily at a specified time or every few days, hours, or minutes. During the log cleanup operation the current log file is renamed (the date and time of the cleanup operation is added to its name) and a new one is created in the same folder. If a log file achieves its maximum size before the cleanup start time, it also will be renamed. NOTE: Not to run out of space on the computer where the log files are stored, it is recommended to check the used disk space periodically and delete the log files that are no longer in use. 62

63 Management Tool About The Management Tool is the component for managing the whole system and viewing monitored data received from Clients. It can be installed on any computer, but a network connection to the Server is required for the Management Tool to operate. There can be several computers with the installed Management Tool in the system. The work with the Management Tool is performed via your browser. Management Tool Installation Prerequisites Prerequisites Overview The following prerequisites are necessary for successful installation of the Management Tool. For Windows 7, it is important that you follow these steps in the correct order. To be able to install the Management Tool, you need to: 1. Turn on the Internet Information Service. 2. Install.NET Framework. 3. Configure the Internet Information Service. 4. Generate a self-signed certificate or import a purchased SSL certificate issued for the computer on which the Management Tool will be installed. 5. Add the certificate to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities on the computer on which the Management Tool will be installed. Otherwise a certificate error will be displayed in your browser when opening the Management Tool. 6. Set HTTPS binding for a default web site (or any other IIS site). NOTE: If you already have a certificate generated for the computer on which the Management Tool will be installed, you can skip certificate generation step and use an existing certificate. 63

64 Turning on Internet Information Service (IIS) Turning on IIS for Windows 8 and Windows 7 To turn on the Internet Information Service for Windows 8 and Windows 7 do the following: 1. Select Control Panel > Programs and Features (Program uninstallation). 2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off navigation link. 3. The Windows Features window opens. 4. In the features tree-view, select the Internet Information Services option. 5. Click OK. 64

65 Turning on IIS for Windows Server 2008 R2 To turn on the Internet Information Service for Windows Server 2008 R2, do the following: 1. In the Start menu, select All Programs > Administrative Tools > Server Manager. 2. In the navigation pane, select Roles, and then click Add Roles. 3. The Add Roles Wizard opens. 4. On the Before You Begin page, click Next. 5. On the Server Roles page, select Web Server (IIS), click Next, and then go to the Role Services page to start configuring Web Server (IIS). 65

66 Turning on IIS for Windows Server 2012 The Internet Information Service can be turned on using the Windows PowerShell or Windows Server 2012 Server Manager. To turn on the Internet Information Service for Windows Server 2012 using Windows PowerShell, do the following: 1. In the Start menu, select Windows PowerShell. 2. Enter the following command and press Enter: Install-WindowsFeature - Web-Server, Web-Mgmt-Tools To turn on the Internet Information Service for Windows Server 2012 using Server Manager, do the following: 1. In the Start menu, select Server Manager. 2. In the navigation pane, select Dashboard, then click Manage > Add roles and features. 3. The Add Roles and Features Wizard opens. 4. On the Before You Begin page, click Next. 5. On the Installation type page, select Role-based or feature-based installation, and then click Next. 66

67 6. On the Server Selection page, select Select a server from the server pool, select your server from the Server Pool list, and then click Next. 67

68 7. On the Server Roles page, select Web Server (IIS), click Next and then click Add Features to start configuring Web Server (IIS). Installing.NET Framework Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016 usually have.net Framework 4.6 installed. If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2008, or if there is no.net Framework on other Windows versions, you can download it from the Microsoft official website and run the installation file on your computer. Alternatively, on Windows Server 2012, you can install.net Framework using Windows PowerShell. To install.net Framework and configure Internet Information Service (IIS) for Windows Server 2012 using Windows PowerShell, do the following: 1. In the Start menu, select Windows PowerShell. 2. Enter the following command and press Enter: Install-WindowsFeature - NET-Framework-Core, NET-Framework-45-ASPNET, Web-Asp- Net45, Web-ISAPI-Ext, Web-ISAPI-Filter Configuring Internet Information Service (IIS) Windows 10 Make sure that all the following options are selected in the Windows Features window and then click OK:.NET Framework 4.6 Advanced Services; 68

69 Internet Information Services > Web Management Tools > IIS Management Console; Internet Information Services > World Wide Web Services > Application Development Features > ASP.NET 3.5 and ASP.NET 4.6; Internet Information Services > World Wide Web Services > Common HTTP Features > Static Content. Windows 8 Make sure that all the following options are selected in the Windows Features window and then click OK:.NET Framework 4.5 Advanced Services; Internet Information Services > Web Management Tools > IIS Management Console; Internet Information Services > World Wide Web Services > Application Development Features > ASP.NET 3.5 and ASP.NET 4.5; Internet Information Services > World Wide Web Services > Common HTTP Features > Static Content. 69

70 Windows 7 Make sure that all the following options are selected in the Windows Features window and then click OK: Internet Information Services > Web Management Tools > IIS Management Console; Internet Information Services > World Wide Web Services > Application Development Features > ASP.NET; Internet Information Services > World Wide Web Services > Common HTTP Features > Static Content. Windows Server In the Add Roles and Features Wizard window, on the Server Roles page, make sure that the Web Server (IIS) option is selected and then click Next. 2. On the Features page, make sure that the following option is selected:.net Framework 4.6 Features >.NET Framework 4.6 and ASP.NET Click Next. 4. On the Web Server Role IIS page, click Next. 5. On the Role Services page, select the ASP.NET 4.6 option (under Application Development). 70

71 6. Click Next and then click Add Features. 7. On the Role Services page, make sure that the following options are selected: Application Development >.NET Extensibility 4.6 ASP.NET 4.6 ISAPI Extensions ISAPI Filters 8. Click Next and then click Install. 9. After the end of installation, click Close. Windows Server In the Add Roles and Features Wizard window, on the Server Roles page, make sure that the Web Server (IIS) option is selected and then click Next. 2. On the Features page, make sure that the following option is selected:.net Framework 4.5 (Installed) > ASP.NET Click Next. 4. On the Web Server Role IIS page, click Next. 5. On the Role Services page, select the ASP.NET 4.5 option (under Application Development). 6. Click Next and then click Add Features. 7. On the Role Services page, make sure that the following options are selected: 71

72 Application Development >.NET Extensibility 4.5 > ASP > NET 4.5 > ISAPI Extensions > ISAPI Filters. 8. Click Next and then click Install. 9. After the end of installation, click Close. Windows Server In the Add Roles Wizard window, on the Role Services page, make sure that the following options are selected: Common HTTP Features > Static Content; Application Development > ASP.NET. 2. Click Next and then click Add Required Role Services. 3. On the Role Services page, make sure that the following options are selected: Management Tools > IIS Management Console. Using Certificates Generating Self-Signed Certificate 4. Click Next and then click Install. 5. After the end of installation, click Close. To generate a self-signed certificate on the computer on which you will install the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Open the Internet Information Service Manager: For Windows 8 or Windows 7: Open Computer > Manage > Services and Applications > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. For Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2008: Press Windows+R, enter inetmgr in the Run window and then press Enter. 72

73 NOTE: Using the inetmgr command is a common way of opening the Internet Information Service Manager for any version of the Windows operating system. 2. Click the main node in the Connections tree-view and then double-click the Server Certificates item under the IIS category. 3. The Server Certificates pane opens. 4. On the Actions pane (to the right), click Create Self-Signed Certificate. 5. The Create Self-Signed Certificate window opens. 6. Enter the name for a certificate in the Specify a friendly name for the certificate box and select Personal in the Select a certificate store for the new certificate drop-down list. Click OK. 73

74 7. The certificate is created. Exporting Self-Signed Certificate To export self-signed certificate, do the following: 1. In the Internet Information Service Manager, on the Server Certificates pane, select the generated certificate and click Export on the Actions pane or in the certificate context menu. 2. In the Export Certificate window, define the location and password for the certificate. Click OK. 3. The certificate is exported and can be added to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities. 74

75 Importing Trusted Certificate To import a purchased certificate issued for the computer, do the following: 1. Open the Internet Information Service Manager: For Windows 8 or Windows 7: Open Computer > Manage > Services and Applications > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. For Windows Server 2012 or 2008: Press Windows+R, enter inetmgr in the Run window and then press Enter. NOTE: Using the inetmgr command is a common way of opening the Internet Information Service Manager for any version of the Windows operating system. 2. Click the main node in the Connections tree-view and then double-click the Server Certificates item under the IIS category. 3. The Server Certificates pane opens. 4. On the Actions pane (to the right), click Import. 5. In the Import Certificate window, click the Browse button to browse for the file of the purchased certificate and enter its password in the Password field. 6. Click OK. 7. The certificate is imported and displayed on the Server Certificates pane of the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. 75

76 Adding Certificate to Trusted Root Certification Authorities Before adding the self-signed certificate to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities, it should be exported. For purchased certificates that were issued for your computer this procedure is not needed. To add the certificate to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities, do the following: 1. Press Windows+R, type mmc in the Run text box and press Enter. 2. In the opened User Account Control window, click Yes. 3. In the Console window, select File > Add/Remove Snap-in. 4. In the opened Add or Remove Snap-ins window, select Certificates > Add. 5. In the opened Certificates snap-in window, select Computer account and click Next. 6. In the opened Select Computer window, select Local computer: (the computer this console is running on) and click Finish. 76

77 7. In the Add or Remove Snap-ins window, click OK. 8. In the Console window, expand the Certificates (Local computer) node. 9. In the Certificates (Local computer) tree-view, find the Trusted Root Certification Authorities node. 10. In the context menu of the Trusted Root Certification Authorities node, select All Tasks > Import. 77

78 11. The Certificate Import Wizard opens. 12. On the Certificate Import Wizard Welcome page, click Next. 13. On the File to Import page, click Browse to find the certificate to be imported and then click Next. 14. On the Private key protection page, enter the certificate password and then click Next. 78

79 15. On the Certificate Store page, click Next. 16. On the last page of the Certificate Import Wizard, click Finish. 79

80 17. In the confirmation message, click OK. 18. The certificate is imported and is displayed in the Console window in the Certificates node. Please note that the Issued To field contains the name of the computer on which the Management Tool will be installed in the format that will be used when opening the Management Tool. 19. Close the Console window. Setting HTTPS Binding for a Default Web-Site To set HTTPS binding for a default web-site, do the following: 1. Open the Internet Information Service Manager: For Windows 8 or Windows 7: Open Computer > Manage > Services and Applications > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. For Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2008: Press Windows+R, enter inetmgr in the Run window and then press Enter. NOTE: Using the inetmgr command is a common way of opening the Internet Information Service Manager for any version of the Windows operating system. 2. Expand the node with the name of the target computer in the central pane. 3. Expand the Sites node. 4. Select the Default Web Site. 80

81 NOTE: If there is no such site in the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager of your computer, you can select any other site (the name of the site does not matter). 5. Click the Bindings navigation link to the right. 6. The Site Bindings window opens. 7. If there is no binding of HTTPS type in the Site Bindings window, click Add. 8. The Edit Site Binding window opens. 9. In the Type box, select https. 10. Next to the SSL certificate drop-down list, click Select. 11. The Select Certificate window opens, where the list of existing certificates is displayed. 81

82 12. In the Select Certificate window, select the certificate generated for the Management Tool and then click OK. 13. In the Add Site Binding window, click OK. 14. In the Site Bindings window, click Close. 15. Now the Internet Information Service is fully adjusted and you can start installing the Management Tool. Installing/Uninstalling/Updating the Management Tool Installing the Management Tool To install the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Run the EkranSystem_ManagementTool.exe installation file. 2. On the Welcome page, click Next. 3. Carefully read the terms of the End-User License Agreement and click I Agree. 4. On the Connection Settings page, do the following and then click Next: In the Server address box, enter the name or IP address of the computer on which the Server is installed. In the URL address field enter the folder where the Management Tool will be located within IIS. This URL will be used when opening the Management Tool. 82

83 5. On the Choose Install Location page, enter the destination folder in the corresponding field or click Browse and in the Browse For Folder window, define the destination folder. Click Install. 6. The installation process starts. Its progress is displayed on the Installing page. 7. After the end of the installation process, click Close to exit the wizard. 8. The Management Tool is displayed as an application of a default web site or any other site with https connection in the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. 9. Now you can open the Management Tool via your browser from the same computer or a remote one. 83

84 Adjusting Computer for Remote Access If you want to open the Management Tool from the computer different from the one where the Management Tool is installed, you need to adjust Firewall settings to be able to access this computer. If the users access Management Tool only from computers where it is installed, there is no need to configure Firewall. To adjust Firewall on the computer where the Management Tool is installed, do the following: 1. In the Control Panel, select System and Security > Windows Firewall. 2. In the Windows Firewall window, click Advanced settings. 3. In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window, right-click Inbound Rules and select New rule. 4. The New Inbound Rule Wizard opens. 5. On the Rule Type page, select Predefined and then select Secure World Wide Web Services (HTTPS) in the list. Click Next. 6. On the Predefined Rules page, select the World Wide Web Services (HTTPS Traffic-In) option. Click Next. 84

85 7. On the Action page, select Allow the connection. Click Finish. 8. The new inbound rule for Firewall is created. Updating Management Tool To update the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Run the Management Tool installation file (EkranSystem_ManagementTool.exe) of a newer version. 2. On the The program is already installed page, select Update and then click Next. 3. Follow the installation instructions. 4. The Management Tool will be updated to the new version. 85

86 Uninstalling Management Tool To uninstall the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Open the Programs and Features window of the Windows Control Panel. 2. In the Programs and Features window, find the Ekran System Management Tool application. 3. In the context menu of the application, select Uninstall. 4. The setup wizard opens and starts the uninstallation process. 5. When the process is completed, click Close to exit the setup wizard. 6. The Management Tool is uninstalled and removed from the Internet Information Service (IIS). Opening Management Tool To open the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Open the browser and enter of the computer or IP on which the Management Tool is installed>/<url address that has been specified during the Management Tool installation> in the address line. For example, NOTE: If the certificate is not added to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities or the name of the computer entered in the browser address does not match the subject (Issued To field) of the certificate, your browser will display a certificate error when opening the Management Tool. 2. The Management Tool opens. 3. Enter the credentials of the existing user added to the system: For an internal user, enter the login and password defined during user creation. For a Windows user, enter the login in the form <domain name>\<user name> and Windows authentication password. Please note, if the Active Directory user group has been added to the system, the users belonging to it can login using their Windows credentials. To save your login for the next authorization, select the Remember me on this computer check box. 4. The Management Tool Home page opens. Please note, the Management Tool may take a while to launch on first connection, since IIS is not used constantly and its processes are stopped and restarted on the connection. If you encounter any problems when opening the Management Tool, see the Troubleshooting chapter. 86

87 Management Tool Interface The Management Tool interface is divided into the following areas: Panes Navigation pane Data View pane Filtering pane Toolbar The Navigation pane The Navigation pane allows you to navigate between different sections of the Management Tool and consists of the following navigation links: Home: Opens the page on which dashboards are displayed, containing information on the system state, recent user activity, and any suspicious user behaviour. Monitoring Results: Opens the page on which the user can view the list of all Client sessions received from Clients the user has the View monitoring results permission for, and export these sessions. Forensic Export History: Displays the list of sessions exported via Forensic Export. A user can download any exported session and validate the already exported session. Report Generator: Opens the Report Generator page on which the user can generate the report of the required type by defined parameters and then save it or print it. Interactive Monitoring: Opens the Interactive Monitoring page on which the user can view statistic data on user activity displayed in two column charts (Applications Monitoring and URL Monitoring). Client Management: Displays the information about all Clients in the system. The number of Clients displayed on the page depends upon permissions given to users that log in to the Management Tool. Additionally, the user can navigate to the Blocked User list from the Client Management page. User Management: Displays the information about all Users in the system and is available to users that have the User management permission. Access Management: Opens the Access Management page on which the user can manage Two-Factor Authentication keys, One-Time Passwords, Restricted Users and Privileged User Accounts and Session Management (PASM). Alert Management: Displays the information about alerts assigned to your Clients. Kernel-level USB monitoring: Displays the list of all USB monitoring rules for all the Clients in the system and is available to users with the administrative Client installation and management permission. Scheduled Reports: Opens the Scheduled Reports page on which the user can view and manage report generation rules, and view rule logs. 87

88 Database Management: Opens the page on which the user with the Database management permission can perform archiving and cleanup of the Database. Serial Key Management: Displays the information about your Serial key and contains keys activating/deactivating options. It is available for the users of the Administrators user group in the Single-tenant mode and for the users of the default tenant that have the administrative Tenant management and System configuration permission in the Multi-tenant mode. Configuration: Opens the page on which the user can define the sending settings, Player link settings, System settings, Customization, Log settings, Ticketing system integration settings, LDAP Targets, Date & Time Format, and Server settings. Management Tool Log: Contains information on all user actions performed in the Management Tool. Health Monitoring: Displays the information on the system state and the resource usage on the Server computer for the users of the Administrators user group in the Singletenant mode and for the users of the default tenant that have the administrative Tenant management and System configuration permission in the Multi-tenant mode. Also, it contains information on the lost Clients for the users with Client installation and management permission. The Data View pane The Data View pane contains a grid with the information about your Clients, Users, Alerts, database, and Serial keys. The Filtering pane The Filtering pane allows you to filter the Clients, Users, and Alerts by keywords of their names and hide offline/online/uninstalled/licensed/windows/macos/linux Clients. Toolbar The Toolbar of the Management Tool allows you to perform basic actions with Clients, Users, and Alerts. The options of the Toolbar are the following: For Client Management: Add Client Group, Install Clients, Manage Licenses, Edit Uninstallation Key, Uninstall Clients, Delete Clients, Blocked User List, and One-Time Passwords. For User Management: Add User and Add User Group. For Alert Management: Add Alert, Manage Multiple Alerts, Export Alerts, Import Alerts, and Global Alert Settings. For Kernel-Level USB Monitoring Management: Add Rule. For Scheduled Reports: Add Rule. For Forensic Export: Validate Export Results. 88

89 Changing Password for Logged in User Internal users, including the Built-in administrator, can change their passwords after logging in to the Management Tool. This action is not available for Active Directory users. To change your password, do the following: 1. Click your user name in the upper right corner of any Management Tool page. 2. The Manage account page opens. 3. In the Current password box, type your current password. 4. In the New password box, type the new password. 5. Re-enter the password in the Confirm password box. 6. Click Change password. 7. Your password is changed. You will need to use it during the next log in. 89

90 Multi-Tenant Mode/Single-Tenant Ekran System Mode About By default, Ekran System is installed in the Single-Tenant mode, so all Clients and settings are shared with all users according to their permissions. If necessary, you can use the Ekran System in the Multi-Tenant mode. In this mode, all tenant users have access to their tenant Clients, but they have no access to other tenants Clients, configurations, alerts, reports, etc. The Multi-Tenant mode is available only for Windows Clients. Linux Clients always belong to the default tenant. NOTE: The Multi-Tenant mode is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. User Types in Ekran System Deployed in Multi-Tenant Mode There are three types of users in the Multi-Tenant mode. NOTE: Tenant admins or users can see the only information belonging to their tenant. Admin of the default tenant (Technician) Technicians are able to perform the next actions: Manage serial keys (activate/deactivate serial keys and grant licenses to tenants) Manage Tenants: View Add Edit Delete View the system state on the Health Monitoring page Download Server and Management Tool log files Configure all custom settings except granting a technician full access to the tenant account, defining custom subjects and configuring date and time format settings Do all actions of the tenant admin for the default tenant. Tenant Admin Tenant Admin is the account created by the technician during tenant creation (for the default tenant, it is a user with the login admin and the password defined during the Server installation). Tenant Admins are able to perform such actions: Manage tenant users and define their permissions 90

91 Manage user groups containing tenant users Generate Client installation packages (and view the automatically generated token for manual definition during the Offline Client installation) Manage Client Groups (for tenant s Clients) Edit uninstallation key (for tenant s Clients) Manage alerts Manage kernel-level USB monitoring rules Assign licenses from the license pool provided by the technician to Clients Manage blocked and restricted users Allow users to use time-based one-time passwords and one-time passwords View, export, and download sessions of tenant s Clients and validate the export results Use Interactive Monitoring to view statistic information on tenant s Clients Generate reports with data received from tenant s Clients, schedule report generation View the Management Tool Log for tenant users and admins View and manage dashboards View the Offline Clients tab on the Health Monitoring page Grant a technician full access to the tenant account Define custom subjects and configure date and time format settings Tenant User Tenant User is able to perform the same actions as the Tenant Admin according to granted permissions. Enabling Multi-Tenant Mode To enable the Multi-Tenant Mode: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 3. On the System settings tab, in the Ekran System Mode group, select the Enable Multitenant mode option and click Save. 4. The Tenant Management navigation link appears in the navigation pane. 5. Click the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 6. On the Tenants page, select the Built-in default tenant and then click Edit Tenant. 7. On the Licenses tab, select the amount of licenses of each type to be unassigned from the Built-in default tenant. This amount of licenses will be available for the tenants created by the technician. 8. Add Tenants. NOTE: To move already installed Windows Clients to the Tenant, you need to reinstall them. 91

92 Tenant Management Viewing Tenants The Tenants are displayed on the Tenant Management page in the Management Tool. The list of Tenant contains the following information: Tenant Name Tenant Admin Description Tenant Key (a unique identifier used by Clients to detect the tenant they belong to) On the Tenant Management page, you can add new Tenants and edit existing Tenants (including deletion). Adding Tenants To add a new tenant, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Click the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Tenants page, click Add Tenant. 4. On the Tenant Settings tab, define the tenant name and description. 5. To register the tenant admin, define the following information: To register the tenant admin via , select the Register the tenant admin via option and define an address in the box. The with credentials will be sent to the tenant admin. To register the domain tenant admin, select the Select the tenant admin from the domain users option and define the domain name and the user name. 92

93 6. On the Licenses tab, enter the amount of licenses of each type to be granted to the tenant. Please note that when the Multi-tenant mode is enabled, all licenses are assigned to the default tenant. Before creating a new tenant, you need to unassign the necessary amount of the licenses to be granted to a new tenant. 7. Click Finish. 8. The tenant is added and displayed on the Tenants page. 93

94 Editing Tenants To edit an existing tenant, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Click the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Tenants page, click Edit Tenant for the required tenant. 4. Edit tenant properties on the corresponding tabs in the same way as when adding a new tenant. 5. The tenant is edited. Decreasing Granted Licenses Number To decrease the number of the licenses granted to the tenant, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Click the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Tenants page, click Edit Tenant for the required tenant. 4. On the Licenses tab, decrease the amount of the granted licenses. NOTE: If after decreasing, the number of granted licenses is smaller than the number of licenses assigned to the tenant s Clients, some Clients will become not licensed. 5. Click Finish. Resending to the Tenant Admin If you need to change the tenant admin registered via or if the tenant admin forgot password, you can resend an . To resend with credentials to the tenant admin, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Click the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Tenants page, click Edit Tenant for the required tenant. 4. On the Tenant Details tab, click Resend The with a new password is sent. 94

95 Changing the Domain Tenant Admin To change the domain tenant admin, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Click the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Tenants page, click Edit Tenant for the required tenant. 4. On the Tenant Details tab, in the Tenant Admin group, define a new domain name and a new user name. 5. Click Finish. The domain tenant admin is changed. The login and password are changed with the help of Active Directory. Deleting Tenants Deleting a tenant means that a tenant admin will not be able to use the system and all data and users. If you delete the tenant when its admin is logged in the Management Tool, the Management Tool will become unavailable to the tenant admin at once and none of its pages will be displayed. NOTE: If the tenant has at least one Client, it cannot be deleted. To delete a tenant, you need to delete all its Clients first. To delete a tenant, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Click the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Tenants page, click Edit Tenant for the required tenant. 4. On the Tenant Settings tab, click Delete Tenant. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 6. The tenant is deleted. Switching to Tenant Account 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission. 2. Сlick the Tenant Management navigation link to the left. 3. The Tenants page opens. 4. Select the necessary tenant account from the Tenants list, and then click the Switch to link. NOTE: This action is available only for tenants where the tenant admin enabled the Grant access to the tenant account option. 95

96 5. You will be logged out and automatically logged in as selected tenant admin. In the Management Tool, you can see and perform all actions available for the admin of the selected tenant account. 6. To switch back to the technician account, log off and login with your credentials. Granting Technician Access to Tenant Account Data By default, only tenant users have access to the tenant data. Optionally, the tenant admin can grant access to it to the technician. After getting an access, the technician can login under the tenant admin account and will be able to perform all actions as tenant admin. To grant access to tenant account information, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a tenant admin. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 3. On the System Settings tab, select the Grant a technician full access to my tenant account option and click Save. 4. In the warning message, click Yes. 5. The access to tenant account has been provided to the technician. Now the technician can login and view as the tenant admin. 96

97 Licensing General Licensing Information To start receiving information from the Clients, you have to assign licenses to them. Five types of licenses are available: License OS Required additional configuration Number of recorded concurrent sessions Workstation Client Infrastructure Server Client Windows desktop OS, Windows desktop in Amazon or Azure Cloud, macos Terminal Server Client Windows Server installed Remote Desktop Services/Terminal Services or Citrix Server or Published App Server or unlimited deployed on Microsoft Azure or Amazon Web Services Linux/UNIX Server Client Linux, Oracle Solaris, IBM AIX - unlimited NOTE: Licenses of the workstation type cannot be assigned to a computer with Server OS. Each Client can have only one license assigned. During the first connection to the Server, the license corresponding to the Client computer operating system is automatically assigned to a Client. If the license has not been automatically assigned, then you will have to assign the license to the Client manually. 97

98 Getting Licenses by the Default Tenant Admin (Technician) About Serial Keys When you log into the Management Tool for the first time, you can request a trial serial key which allows you to use 3 Workstation Client licenses, 3 Linux/UNIX Server Client licenses, and 1 Terminal Server Client license for 30 days. The trial serial key will be sent to the address you specify in the request form. In the Multi-tenant mode, the technician activates serial keys and grants licenses from them to tenants. To use the system permanently and with a greater number of licenses, you have to license it with purchased serial keys on a computer with the installed Server. NOTE: After activation of any serial key, the embedded trial key expires. Five types of serial keys are available: Permanent serial keys: These keys allow you to use licenses they contain during the unlimited period of time. Trial serial keys: These keys allow you to use the licenses they contain for 30 days (may vary) from activation and update the product during this period. Update and Support serial keys: These keys allow you to extend your update and support period. Enterprise serial keys: These keys allow you to get access to the enterprise features of the Ekran System during the unlimited period of time. See the detailed information on the Standard and Enterprise Editions of Ekran System in the Appendix. Trial enterprise keys: These keys allow you to get access to the enterprise features of the Ekran System for 30 days (may vary) from activation and update the product during this period. Each permanent, trial, and update and support serial key contains the following data: Update & support period Licenses for the Clients The enterprise serial key does not contain any Client licenses and is active during the unlimited period of time. This key grants you an access to such valuable features of the Ekran System as Database Archiving, Advanced SIEM Integration, One-Time Password, High Availability, Multi- Tenant Mode, Privileged User Accounts and Session Management, IP Filtering, Isolate Database from Clients, and Health Monitoring. Once you have purchased serial keys, you can either activate serial keys online or add activated serial keys if you have no Internet connection on a computer with the installed Server. Contact your vendor for information on purchasing serial keys. 98

99 You need to belong to the Administrators user group of the built-in default tenant to activate serial keys. Please note, after the activation, serial keys are bound to a specific computer and cannot be used on another computer. If the hardware ID of the computer was changed, contact the support team at support@ekransystem.com to change the hardware ID associated with your serial keys to a new one. About Update & Support Period An Update & support period is a period that defines what updates can be applied to your copy of the product. Updates are defined by their release date. After the update & support period expires, you can still assign licenses to Clients, but you will be unable to update the System to versions released after the update & support period expiration date. The update & support period end date is defined during the serial key activation (either via the Management Tool or on the vendor s site). It is calculated using a serial key with the longest update & support period. Example: If you activate two keys, one with a 30 days update & support period and one with a 12 months update & support period, simultaneously, the update & support period end date will be set to 12 months from the activation date. When a new serial key is being activated, the update & support period is prolonged accordingly. Please note, if the current update & support period is longer than the one of a key being activated, current update & support period does not change. For example, if you activate a key with 12 months update & support period after a key with 30 days update & support period, the update & support end date will be set to 12 months since the activation date. But if you activate a key with 30 days update & support period after a key with 12 months update & support period, the update & support period end date will not change. If your update & support period expires, you can purchase a special serial key, which does not contain any licenses, but extends your update & support period, or you can activate any other serial key. Viewing License State You can view the information on serial keys you have activated or added and license details on the Serial Key Management page in the Management Tool. To view the license state, open the Management Tool and click the Serial Key Management navigation link to the left. Select the Serial Keys tab. The following information is displayed on the Serial Keys tab: Update & support period end date: The update & support period end date is calculated basing on dates of serial keys activation and their subscription periods. 99

100 Workstation/Terminal Server/Infrastructure Server/Linux/UNIX Server Client licenses used: The number of licenses of the corresponding type used out of total number, which is summed up from all activated serial keys. Not licensed Clients: The number of installed Clients with no licenses assigned. Enterprise key: Displays whether the target Server computer has an activated enterprise serial key. The following information is displayed in the Serial Key Management grid: o Key o Activation date o Type: Enterprise/Permanent/Update and Support/Trial/Trial Enterprise o State: activated/deactivated/expired o Details: expiration/deactivation date, type and number of licenses Activating Serial Keys Online To activate purchased serial keys online, do the following: 1. Make sure you have an active Internet connection on the computer with the installed Server. 2. Log in to the Management Tool as a user of the Administrators user group. 3. Click the Serial Key Management navigation link to the left. 4. On the Serial Keys tab, click Activate keys online. 5. In the Serial Key Activation window, enter serial keys to be activated separating them with semicolons or paragraphs and click Activate. 100

101 6. The activated keys will appear on the Serial Key Management page. 7. The number of available licenses and the update & support period end date change. Adding Activated Serial Keys Offline If you have no Internet connection on a computer on which the serial keys are to be activated, you can activate them on the license site and then add the activated serial keys offline. For more information, send an to info@ekransystem.com NOTE: Update and Support serial keys cannot be activated offline. To activate serial keys offline on the license site, do the following: 1. On the computer with the installed Server, start the UniqueIdentifierGenerator.exe file, which you can download at exe 2. The Unique Identifier Generator window opens. 3. Click Generate to generate a unique identifier for your computer. 4. When a unique identifier for your computer is generated, it will appear in a text box under the Unique Identifier group of options. 5. Copy the unique identifier from the text box to a text file on a removable drive. 6. Go to the license site. 7. Enter the generated unique identifier in the Unique Identifier box. 8. Copy and paste the purchased serial keys to the Serial Keys box separating them with paragraphs or spaces. 9. Enter the CAPTCHA text in a text box near the CAPTCHA image. 10. Click Activate. 11. The activatedkeys.txt file will be generated. Save the file on a removable drive. 12. Copy the file to the computer on which you will open the Management Tool. NOTE: Please do not edit the generated file activatedkeys.txt. 101

102 To add activated serial keys in offline mode, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user of the Administrators user group. 2. Click the Serial Key Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Serial Keys tab, click Add activated keys. 4. On the Activated Serial Key Adding page, click Choose File and navigate to the activatedkeys.txt file with activated serial keys. 5. Click Add. 6. The newly added serial keys appear on the Serial Key Management page. 7. The number of available licenses and the update & support period end date change. 8. If there are both licensed and unlicensed Clients in your network and you want to license the rest of Clients with a purchased key, you will have to assign the license to the remaining unlicensed Clients manually. Deactivating Serial Keys If for some reason you decide to discontinue using Ekran System, you can deactivate serial keys. To deactivate a serial key, do the following: 1. Make sure you have an active Internet connection on the computer with the installed Server. 2. Log in to the Management Tool as a user of the Administrators user group. 3. Click the Serial Key Management navigation link to the left. 4. On the Serial Keys tab, select a serial key to be deactivated and click Deactivate selected. NOTE: Expired serial keys can t be deactivated. 5. In the confirmation message, click Deactivate. 6. The deactivated serial key is marked as Deactivated in the State column of the Serial Key Management page. 7. The number of available licenses and the update & support period end date change. Viewing Licenses Granted to Tenants You can view the information on licenses you have granted to tenants on the Serial Key Management page in the Management Tool. To view the granted licenses, open the Management Tool and click the Serial Key Management navigation link to the left. Select the Granted Licenses tab. The following information is displayed in the Granted Licenses table: o Tenant Name o Number of Workstation licenses/terminal Server licenses/infrastructure Server licenses/linux licenses 102

103 License Management Getting License Information (Tenant Admin) For the tenant admin, to view the granted licenses, open the Management Tool and click the Home navigation link to the left. On the top of the page, in the Licenses Dashboard, the number of licenses available for your tenant Clients is displayed. Client License Management The Client license management is performed in the Management Tool by the user with the administrative Client installation and management and License management permissions. You can assign a license to a Client or unassign it manually any time. The license can be assigned to an offline Client, and it will be applied after the Client is online. If the Client is uninstalled, its license becomes free and can be assigned to another Client. NOTE: When a trial serial key expires, the corresponding number of licenses is automatically unassigned from Clients. Information about the number of used and free licenses of each type is displayed on the License Management page in the Management Tool. To assign a license to one Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the needed Client from the list and then click Edit Client. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, in the License box, select the type of license you want to assign to the Client. 5. Click Finish. 6. The license is assigned to the Client. To manage licenses to several Clients, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Manage Licenses. 4. On the License Management page, select the Clients to which the licenses should be assigned. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 5. When the Clients are selected, click one of the following: 103

104 Assign recommended license: Assigns licenses to the selected Clients, automatically defining the type of license basing on the operating system of the Client computers. If the corresponding type of license is missing, a license of a higher type can be assigned. Assign license of specific type: Assigns selected licenses of a specific type to the selected Clients. Unassign license: Removes licenses from the selected Clients. NOTE: To change the Client license type, you do not need to unassign the current license. This will be done automatically. 104

105 User and User Group Management About By default, there is one administrator in the system, whose login is admin and whose password is defined during the Server installation. The administrator has all the rights for work in the system. If the Multi-tenant mode is enabled, the administrator is the technician and is able to create tenants. In order to grant others access to the system, you can add users and define their permissions. There are two types of users: Internal users Active Directory users (Windows domain users and Windows domain user groups) To define permissions for users, you can create user groups. One user can belong to several user groups. In the Multi-tenant mode, users and user groups are independent for each tenant. When the user is added to a group, they inherit all permissions from a group. If the user inherited some permissions from a group, these permissions can be removed only by removing the user from this group. Apart from permissions received from the group, you can assign other permissions to a specific user. By default, there are three user groups in the system: All Users: A group that contains all created users. Administrators: A group of users that can perform administrative functions within the system. If a user is added to this group, they receive all administrative and Client permissions within the system. Supervisors: A group of users that perform major investigative work with the Clients. If a user is added to this group, they receive the Viewing monitoring results permission for All Clients. You can also add other custom user groups and manage them yourself. Please note, user and user group management is allowed only to the users with the administrative User management permission. Viewing Users and User Groups The Users and User Groups are displayed on the User Management page in the Management Tool. Users are grouped by the User Groups which they belong to. The lists of Users contain the following information: Login First Name Last Name Description 105

106 NOTE: For Active Directory users, their first name and last name will be filled automatically after the first log in to the system. To find a required User, enter a part of their user name, first name, last name or description in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. On the User Management page, you can add new Users/User Groups and edit existing Users/User Groups (including deletion). User Management Adding Users To add a new user, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Click the User Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Users page, click Add User. 4. On the User Type tab, select the type of the user you want to add: Click Add an Internal user to create an internal application user. Click Add an Active Directory user/user group to add an existing Windows user/user group. 106

107 5. On the User Details tab, do one of the following and click Next: For an internal user, define user credentials and additional information about the user. NOTE: Login and password are required. The login must be unique. In the Multi-tenant mode, users of different tenants cannot have the same login. The password must be at least 6 characters long. The maximum length of the first name, last name, and description is 200 characters. For an Active Directory user/user group, select the domain in the Domain list and then enter at least two characters into the User/User group box to search for the required user/user group. 107

108 NOTE: The Active Directory user/user group cannot be added if there is no LDAP target added for the required domain on the Configuration page or if the connection with the domain is lost (the domain is unavailable). 6. On the User Groups tab, select the user groups the user will belong to. To find a specific group, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. Click Next. NOTE: The user is automatically added to the default All Users group and can t be removed from it. 7. On the Administrative Permissions tab, select administrative permissions that will be given to the user. Click Next. NOTE: If the user has inherited some permissions from user groups, you can only add new permissions. To remove permissions inherited from user groups, you need to remove the user from these groups. 108

109 8. On the Client Permissions tab, do the following: Select the necessary Client/Client Group. To find a specific Client/Client Group, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. Click Edit Permissions and then, in the Client Permissions/Client Group Permissions window, define the Client permissions which will be given to a user for the corresponding Client/Client Group. When the permissions are defined, click Save to close the Client Permissions/Client Group Permissions window. 9. Click Finish. 10. The user is added and displayed on the Users page. NOTE: For an Active Directory user, the first name and last name properties will be automatically filled after the user s first login to the system. 109

110 Editing Users To edit an existing user, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Click the User Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Users page, click Edit User for the required user. 4. Edit user properties and permissions on the corresponding tabs in the same way as when adding a new user. NOTE: Click Next or Finish to save the changes on each tab. 5. The user is edited. Deleting Users Deleting a user means that a user will not be able to use the system. If you delete the user who is logged in the Management Tool, the Management Tool will become unavailable to the user at once and none of its pages will be displayed. To delete a user, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Click the User Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Users page, click Edit User for the required user. 4. On the User Details tab, click Delete User. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 6. The user is deleted. User Group Management Adding User Groups To add a new user group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Click the User Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Users page, click Add User Group. 4. On the Group Properties tab, define the name for the user group and, optionally, define its description. Click Next. 5. On the User Management tab, select users that will belong to the user group. To find a specific user, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. Click Next. 110

111 6. On the Administrative Permissions tab, select administrative permissions that will be given to all users belonging to this user group. Click Next. 7. On the Client Permissions tab, find the Client/Client Group for which permissions are to be defined. To find a specific Client/ Client Group, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. Click Edit Permissions and then, in the Client Permissions/ Client Group Permissions window, define the Client permissions which will be given to a user for the corresponding Client/Client Group. After you have defined all Client permissions, click Save to close the Client Permissions/ Client Group Permissions window. 8. On the Client Permissions tab, click Finish. 9. The user group is added. Editing User Groups To edit an existing user group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Click the User Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Users page, click Edit User Group for the required user group. 4. Edit user group properties and permissions on the corresponding tabs in the same way as when adding a new user group. NOTE: Click Next or Finish to save the changes on each tab. 5. The user group is edited. Deleting User Groups Deleting a user group does not delete users belonging to it. If the group is deleted, its users no longer have permissions given by this user group unless these permissions are inherited from another user group. NOTE: The user group All Users cannot be deleted. To delete a user group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Click the User Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Users page, click Edit User Group for the required user group. 4. On the Group Properties tab, click Delete Group. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 111

112 6. The user group is deleted. Permissions About The permissions allow you to define which functions a user will be able to perform with the system and Clients. There are two types of permissions: Administrative permissions define actions that a user can perform with the whole system. Client permissions define actions that a user can perform with selected Clients. The permissions can be defined during user and user group adding/editing. If you define permissions for the group, any user belonging to this group inherits these permissions. To remove permissions inherited by the user from a group, you need to remove the user from a group. Apart from permissions inherited from the group, you can assign a user their own permissions. Administrative Permissions The following administrative permissions are available: License management: Allows a user to assign licenses to Clients. User management: Allows a user to add, edit, delete Users/User groups and define permissions for them. It also allows a user to view the Management Tool log. Client installation and management: Allows a user to install Clients, add, edit, and delete Client groups, manage alerts, define alert settings, create and manage scheduled report rules, view report logs, define sending settings, create and manage the USB monitoring & blocking rules, as well as block users. Database management: Allows a user to get information on the database, perform database cleanup, delete Clients from the database. Viewing archived data: Allows a user to view and export sessions from archive databases. Tenant management and system configuration (for the users of the default tenant): Allows a user to manage Tenants, grant licenses to them and define configuration. Also, it allows a user to activate and deactivate serial keys, and download Server and Management Tool log files. NOTE: In the Single-tenant mode, this permission is granted to the users of the Administrators group by default and cannot be granted to users of other groups. 112

113 Client Permissions Client permissions define which actions a user will be able to perform with the Clients. If a user does not have the administrative Client installation and management permission, in the Management Tool they will see only those Clients for which they have at least one Client permission. NOTE: Client permissions are defined for each Client or Client Group individually. The following Client permissions are available: Client configuration management: Allows a user to define Client configuration. Viewing monitoring results: Allows a user to: o View the results of Client monitoring and Forensic Export results in the Management Tool. o View Client configuration. o Generate reports in the Management Tool. [Windows Clients] Viewing text data: Allows a user to view clipboard text data recorded during Client monitoring [Windows Clients] Client uninstallation: Allows a user to uninstall a Client. Access Client computer: Allows a user to log in to the Client computer with enabled forced user authentication. It is available for Linux and Windows computers. Permission Example You can define the permission for a user, by selecting the Edit User option and selecting the option next to the required permission on the Administrative Permissions tab. If the user belongs to several Groups, they will inherit all the permissions defined for them. For example: There is a user Joe who belongs to Group 1 and Group 2 user groups. Besides, there are Client 1 and Client 2 that belong to All Clients group. The following permissions are given to the user Joe, Group 1, and Group 2 by the administrator: User/User Group Administrative Client permissions permissions Permission For Group 1 User management Client uninstallation Client 1 Group 2 Database management Viewing monitoring Client 2 results User Joe Client installation and management Viewing monitoring results Client 1 113

114 Database management Client configuration management As a result, the user Joe will have the following permissions: Administrative o User management permission (Because he belongs to Group 1). All Clients o Database management permission (Because he belongs to Group 2. But he also has his own Database management permission, and thus will have it even if Group 2 is deleted or its permissions are edited). o Client installation and management permission (He will have this permission irrespective to user groups which he will be added to). Client permissions for Client 1 o Client uninstallation permission (Because he belongs to Group 1). o Viewing monitoring results permission (Because it is his own permission and he will have it irrespective to user groups which he will be added to). o Client configuration management permission (Because the Client belongs to All Clients group). 114

115 Client permissions for Client 2 o Viewing monitoring results permission (Because he belongs to Group 2). o Client configuration management permission (Because the Client belongs to All Clients group). 115

116 Management Tool Log About The Management Tool Log is a component that contains information on all user actions performed in the Management Tool. Such information might be useful for the administrator to manage and monitor the actions of all users in the system. Viewing the Management Tool Log is available only to users with the administrative User management permissions. Viewing Management Tool Log To view the log, log into the Management Tool and click the Management Tool Log navigation link to the left. On the Management Tool Log page, the Log Grid with the following data is displayed: Time: Displays the date & time the action was performed. User Name: Displays the name of the user who performed the action. User Groups: Displays the list of the User Groups the user belongs to. Category: Displays the category the action performed belongs to. Action: Displays the action performed. Object: Displays the list of the objects affected by the action. Details: Displays additional information about the action performed. You can define the number of the log entries to be displayed per page: 10/100/250/1000. All actions performed by the users in the Management Tool are grouped by the following categories: 1. Alert management. Contains the information on the alert configuration being changed, as well as exporting, importing, deleting older alerts, creating new ones, and changing the Global Alert settings. 2. Alert player viewing. Contains the information on viewing alert events in the Alert Viewer by a user. 3. Archived Sessions Viewing. Contains the information on the archived sessions being opened in the Session Viewer or being exported via Forensic Export. 116

117 4. Client editing. Contains the information on the Client configuration being changed. If there were multiple configuration changes, they are combined in a single log entry. 5. Client group management. Contains the information on the Client Group configuration being changed, as well as deleting older Client Groups and creating new ones. 6. Client installation/uninstallation. Contains the information on installation and uninstallation of the Clients performed by a user, as well as the Client uninstallation key being changed. 7. Database cleanup. Contains the information on the manual & automatic cleanup being performed and the changes made to the automatic cleanup settings by a user. 8. Database management. Contains the information on the database shrinking, database archiving and cleanup, and statistics update performed by a user. 9. Date & Time Format. Contains the information on the date and time format settings being changed. 10. Diagnostics. Contains the information on downloading the server and Management Tool log files by a user sending settings. Contains the information on the sending settings being changed. 12. Forensic Export. Contains the information on users performing Forensic Export, downloading and deleting the Forensic Export results, as well as validating those results. 13. Health Panel. Contains the information on the error events records being deleted in the System State grid on the Health Monitoring page. 14. Interactive monitoring. Contains the information on Clients, users on Client computers, and time period, for which the Application Monitoring and URL Monitoring widgets were generated. 15. Kernel-level USB monitoring. Contains the information on the USB monitoring & blocking rules being changed by a user, as well as deleting older rules and creating new ones. 16. LDAP targets. Contains the information on the added, edited, and deleted LDAP targets. 17. Log in / Log off. Contains the information on users logging in/logging off (including MT being closed, session expiring, etc.). 18. Log settings. Contains the information on the log settings being changed. 19. One-time password. Contains the information on generated, used, expired and manually terminated one-time passwords. 20. Report generation. Contains the information on the reports generated by a user, both via Report Generator and from the Scheduled rule. It also contains information about the generated reports being downloaded by a particular user. 21. Scheduled report management. Contains the information on the Scheduled Report rules being changed by a user, as well as deleting older rules and creating new ones. 22. Serial key management. Contains the information on adding, activation, and deactivation of the serial keys by a user. 23. Session Viewing. Contains the information on the sessions opened in the Session Viewer by a user. 117

118 24. Ticketing system integration. Contains the information on the ticketing system integration being enabled or disabled and on the ticketing system access parameters being edited. 25. Two-Factor Authentication. Contains the information on the users being added or deleted on the Two-Factor Authentication page and on editing of two-factor authentication keys. 26. User blocking. Contains the information on users being added to and removed from the Blocked User list. 27. User group management. Contains the information on the user group configuration being changed by a user, as well as deleting older user groups, creating new ones, changing the Client and administrative permissions. 28. User management. Contains the information on the user configuration being changed by a user, as well as deleting older users, creating new ones, changing the Client and administrative permissions. Management Tool Log Protection The Management Tool Log is protected against log-altering attacks, its data being encrypted in the database. The database encrypting is unique for each server. If the log has been modified, a warning is displayed that the log data is not valid, and the invalid log entries are marked red. Filtering and Sorting Log Data You can filter and sort the Management Tool log records in the grid. By default, the following filters are displayed: When: Allows filtering Management Tool log records by the time period. The result log records list includes all Management Tool log records for the set period. To set the time period, select one of the following and click Apply: - Define the number of latest hours, days, weeks, or months. - Define the start date and the end date of the time period. Who: Allows filtering Management Tool log records by a specific user who performed an action. Action: Allows filtering Management Tool log records by a specific action that was performed. To add other filters, click More criteria and select a filter from the opened list: 118

119 User Groups: Allows filtering Management Tool log records by the User Groups the user belongs to. Category: Allows filtering Management Tool log records by the category the action performed belongs to. Object: Allows filtering Management Tool log records by the list of the objects affected by the action. To sort Management Tool log records in the Management Tool Log grid, click the required column header. You can change the column sort order from ascending to descending, and vice versa. To do this, click the Sort arrow near the column header. If data is not sorted by this column, the Sort arrow is hidden. To export filtered Management Tool log records, click next to the Management Tool Log tab and select Export filtered records. In the Save As window, browse to the location, where the data should be saved, and click Save. Windows Clients About Windows Client is a program that can be installed on the target computers to monitor the activity of their users. The monitored data is sent to the Server and can be viewed in the Management Tool. Depending upon their permissions, a user can install/uninstall Clients remotely, manage their configuration, and manage Client groups. Monitoring via Windows Clients The Windows Clients work as follows: Each Windows Client starts automatically on computer start. A licensed Windows Client monitors a certain number of local and remote sessions, depending on the license type: - Workstation Client license (one local/remote session) - Infrastructure licenses (up to two concurrent sessions) - Terminal Server Client license (several concurrent sessions) Every time the computer is restarted, the Windows Client starts recording user activity in a new session. The maximum duration of one session can be 24 hours. At 00:00 all live sessions are terminated. After their termination (their status changes from live to finished), new live sessions automatically start. If a user works with several monitors, the Windows Client creates screenshots from all of them. 119

120 The Windows Client sends its monitoring results to the Server. On the Client side, the monitoring data is compressed before sending it to the Server. To disable the data compression on the Client side, in the Windows Registry Editor, select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client key and add a new value: o Value type: DWORD o Value name: Compression o Value data: 0 If there is no connection with the Server, the Client stores the monitored data locally and automatically sends it to the Server when the connection is restored. The data is stored in the TempWrite.dat file in the Client installation folder. The Client can stop writing data to an offline cache in one of the following cases: o The amount of data stored offline reaches the limit at which the Client must stop writing to offline cache: This limit is defined during remote Client installation or during generation of Client installation package. o There is 500 MB of free space on the hard drive left. This parameter can be defined during remote Client installation or generation of Client installation package. The default value is 500 MB. By default, the Windows Client records user activity as follows: o Typing: every 10 seconds. o Mouse clicking: every 3 seconds. o Active window changing: every 3 seconds. To change the frequency of user activity recording, in the Windows Registry Editor, select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client key and modify a value data: 1. Typing o Value name: SmartScrTimer 2. Mouse clicking o Value name: SmartScrTimerMouse User activity recording triggers usually influence each other, though the average frequency of user activity recording is higher. Installing Windows Clients About During the system deployment, remote installation of the Windows Clients is used. Remote installation of the Clients is performed via the Management Tool. To ensure successful remote installation of the Windows Clients, you have to set up the network environment beforehand. If your computers belong to a workgroup but not a domain, you need to know the administrator account credentials for each remote computer. Otherwise, knowing the domain administrator credentials is enough. The Windows Clients can also be installed locally via the installation package generated in the Management Tool. Thus you can distribute the installation package of the Client with 120

121 predefined settings among the network computers and install it. This kind of installation is useful when you experience difficulties with installing the Clients remotely via the Management Tool, or the computers in your network are a part of a workgroup and do not have the same administrative account for each computer. Setting up Environment for Remote Installation Windows Client Installation Prerequisites The majority of Windows Client installation/uninstallation issues are caused by incorrect system or network settings. The following conditions have to be met for successful Windows Client installation: The remote computer has to be online and accessible via network. Shared folders have to be accessible on the remote computer. Simple file sharing (Sharing Wizard) has to be disabled if the computer is in a workgroup (for domain computers this requirement can be skipped). You need to know the domain administrator or local administrator account credentials for the remote computer. The Server and the Remote Procedure Call (RPC) system services have to be running on the remote computer. Windows Vista and Windows XP Firewall has to be properly set up on the remote computer during the Clients remote installation. In Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2008 Firewall, inbound connections have to be allowed in the Remote Service Management (RPC) rule for the remote computers and the File and Printer Sharing option has to be enabled (in this case it is not necessary to disable Windows Firewall). Due to the new SHA-256 code signing, on Windows 7 SP1 and Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, the Microsoft Security Advisory update needs to be installed: In Windows Firewall on the Server side, allow the Server executable to accept TCP connections via port 9447 (for the connection between the Server and the Clients). NOTE: These rules will be added to Windows Firewall automatically if Windows Firewall is enabled during the Server installation. Make sure the conditions mentioned above are met to avoid possible problems with Client remote installation. 121

122 Disabling Simple File Sharing in Windows XP To disable simple file sharing in Windows XP, do the following: 1. Open My Computer. 2. Select Tools > Folder Options in the menu. 3. In the Folder Options window, select the View tab. 4. Clear the Use simple file sharing option. 5. Click Apply and OK to close the window. Disabling Sharing Wizard in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, and Windows 7 To disable the Sharing wizard in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, and Windows 7, do the following: 1. Open the Folder options window: For Windows 8.1/Windows 8: Open the Control Panel and then select Appearance and Personalization. For Windows 7: Open Computer and then select Organize > Folder and search options. 2. In the Folder Options window, select the View tab. 122

123 3. Clear the Use Sharing Wizard option. 4. Click Apply and OK to close the window. Checking System Services To check that the Server and Remote Procedure Call (RPC) system services are running: 1. Right-click Computer and select Manage. The Computer Management window opens. 2. Expand the Services and Applications node and select Services. To quickly access Windows Services, press Windows+R, type services.msc in the Run text box and press Enter. 3. Find the Server service and the Remote Procedure Call (RPC) service in the list of services. Make sure both services are running (their status is displayed as Started). 123

124 4. If one or both services are not running, start them manually. To start the service, right-click it and select Start from the context menu. The selected service is started. Setting up Firewall for Windows Vista, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 It is not necessary to disable the Firewall in Windows Vista, Windows XP, and Windows Server For successful remote installation of the Clients, you have to enable the File and Printer Sharing option. To set up Windows Vista, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 Firewall, do the following: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall. 2. In the Windows Firewall window, select the Exceptions tab. 3. On the Exceptions tab, select the File and Printer Sharing option. 4. Click OK. 124

125 Setting up Firewall for Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2008 It is not necessary to disable the Firewall in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server For successful remote installation of the Clients, you have to allow inbound connections in the Remote Service Management (RPC) rule for the remote computers and enable the File and Printer Sharing option. To enable inbound connections for the Remote Management Service (RPC), do the following: 1. Select Control Panel > System and Security > Windows Firewall. 2. In the Windows Firewall window, click Advanced settings. 3. In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window, click Inbound Rules and then double-click the Remote Service Management (RPC) rule in the rules list. 4. The Remote Service Management (RPC) Properties window opens. 5. On the General tab, select Enabled under General and click Allow the connection under Action. 125

126 6. On the Advanced tab, under Profiles, select the profile of the network used for connecting remote computers and the Server. 7. Click Apply and then OK to save the settings and close the Properties window. 126

127 8. Close the Windows Firewall window. To enable the File and Printer Sharing option, do the following: 1. Select Control Panel > System and Security > Windows Firewall. 2. In the Windows Firewall window, click Allow an app or feature through Windows Firewall. 3. In the opened Allowed apps window, click Change settings. 4. Select the File and Printer Sharing option and then click OK. 127

128 Installing Windows Clients Remotely via the Management Tool About You can install the Windows Clients remotely via the Management Tool. This way of installation is very convenient if all computers in your network have the same domain administrator credentials. Remote Windows Client Installation is performed by a user who has the Client installation and management permission in two steps: 1. Selecting computers on which Clients will be installed. 2. Defining installation parameters and installing the Clients. Selecting Computers To select the computers for Client installation, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Install Clients. 4. The Computers without Clients page opens. On this page, you can see the computers for which the previous installations failed. 5. Select how you would like to search for computers where the Windows Clients will be installed: To select computers from the list of all computers in your network, click Deploy via network scan. To select computers by IP range (IPv4 or IPv6 addresses), click Deploy via IP range. To select computers by their names, click Deploy on specific computers. 6. In the Choose search results window: Click Start new search to look for computers with defined parameters. 128

129 Click Previous search results to choose the computers found in the previous search. If you have not performed any searches yet, this option will be absent. 7. If you have selected the Deploy via IP range option, the Computers Scan page opens. In the From Address and To Address boxes, enter the IP range (either IPv4 or IPv6) for which the network should be scanned. To find only one computer, enter the same IP address in both boxes. Click Scan. 8. If you have selected the Deploy on specific computers option, the Adding Computers page opens. Enter the names of computers on which Windows Clients must be installed in the box Name and click Scan. Use semicolon to separate computer names. Please note that you should enter the full name of the computer. 9. The scanning process starts. The list of found computers will be updated automatically. If it is not updated, click Refresh. To stop the scanning process, click Stop. 10. When the scanning process finishes, select check boxes next to the computers that you want to install the Clients on. Click Next. 11. The selected computers are added to the list on the Computers without Clients page. 12. If you want to remove some computers from this list, click Remove from list next to the selected computer. 129

130 Remote Windows Client Installation Process When all computers for Windows Client installation are selected, you are ready to start installation. Please make sure that all selected computers are correctly adjusted. To install the Windows Clients remotely, do the following: 1. On the Computers without Clients page, click Install. 2. On the Client Configuration page, define the name/ip of the Server to which the Windows Clients will connect, and define the Client configuration for the Clients you are installing. Click Next. NOTE: The Server IP address has to be static for Clients to connect to it successfully. Unique external IP addresses should be used for cloud-based Servers. You can add several names and IP addresses separated with comma or semicolon. 3. On the Installation credentials page, enter the credentials of a user with administrator permissions on the target computers for Client installation and then click Next. If the computers are in a domain, enter the domain name and domain administrator account credentials. If the computers are in workgroup, enter the credentials of a local administrator for target computers. If you leave the Domain box empty, the entered credentials will be used as the credentials of a local user of a target computer and the Client will be installed under the <target PC name>\<user name> account. NOTE: All workgroup computers must have the same administrator account credentials. Otherwise use installation via installation package method to deploy the Clients. 4. The installation process starts. The progress of installation will be updated automatically on the Client installation page. If it is not updated, click Refresh. 130

131 NOTE: If the connection with the Server fails, the Client will be not installed. 5. After the end of the installation, the installed Clients will appear on the Clients page in All Clients group. If the installation of some Clients fails, these computers will remain in the Computers without Clients list and you can click Retry to start the installation again. Remote Installation from an Existing.INI File If you already have an.ini file with defined settings generated in the Management Tool and saved to your computer, you can use it for installing the Windows Clients. To install the Windows Clients remotely using an existing.ini file, do the following: 1. On the Computers without Clients page, click Install using existing.ini file. 2. On the INI file selection page, click Choose file to select the.ini file that will be used for configuration of new Clients. Please note, if any parameter except RemoteHost is absent or not valid, its value will be set to default. The RemoteHost parameter is ignored in this type of installation. The Windows Client will connect to the Server to which the Management Tool is connected. 3. Once the.ini file is chosen, click Next and continue the installation the same way as when installing the Clients remotely in a common way. Installing Windows Clients Locally About You can install the Windows Clients locally using the Client installation file generated in the Management Tool. You have two options for downloading the Client installation file from the Management Tool: Generate the installation package and set the Windows Client configuration during generation. Use Client installation file (.exe) to install the Client with default parameters. 131

132 NOTE: Due to the new SHA-256 code signing, on Windows 7 SP1 and Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, the Microsoft Security Advisory update needs to be installed: Windows Client Installation Package The installation package consists of 2 components: A signed EkranSystemClient.exe installation file. An EkranSystemClient.ini text configuration file that contains the Windows Client installation parameters defining the Server to which the Client will connect, and the Client configuration. The table below lists all the Windows Client installation parameters. If any parameter except RemoteHost is absent or not valid, its value will be set to default. Parameter Description Default Value Server name/ip RemoteHost A name or IP address of the computer on which the Server is installed. This parameter might contain several names and IP addresses separated with comma or semicolon. NOTE: The Server IP address has to be static for Clients to connect to it successfully. Unique external IP addresses should be used for cloud-based Servers. No RemotePort The Ekran Server port via which the Clients connect to the Server. By default, it is set to Frequency settings for user activity recording 9447 EnableActivity Recording user activity and creating screenshots when an active window is changed. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Enabled EnableWndNmChang es Recording user activity and creating screenshots when a window name is changed. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Enabled 132

133 Parameter Description Default Value EnableKBandMouse Recording user activity and creating screenshots on clicking and a key pressing. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Enabled EnableTimer Recording user activity and creating screenshots with a certain time interval. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Disabled Timer Time interval of user activity recording and screenshot creation in seconds. This period can t be less than 30 seconds. This parameter is needed if the EnableTimer parameter is set. 30 Screenshot settings EnableScreenshotCre ation Creating screenshots along with recording user activity. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Enabled EnableCaptureActive WindowOnly Screenshots and recorded metadata will contain information on active window only. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Disabled ColorDepth A colour scheme used for screenshots saving. 7 4 bits (Grayscale), 8 8 bits, bits. 7(4 bits (Grayscal e)) Monitoring parameters EnableClipboardMon Logging of copy and paste operations. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Enabled EnableSystemIdleDet ect The system idle event detection. If the value is 1, the system idle event detection is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Enabled 133

134 Parameter Description Default Value EnableIdleForceTime out Registering idle event when user is inactive. If the value is 1, the forced idle event timeout is enabled, if the value is 0- disabled. Enabled IdleForceTimeout Time interval when user is inactive. This period can t be less than 5 minutes. By default, it is set to 15 minutes. 15 Keystroke monitoring parameters EnableKeystrokes Logging of a keystroke. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Enabled StartSessionOnKeyw ord Starting monitoring on detecting a suspicious keyword in the keystrokes. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Disabled Keywords A list of keywords, which being typed trigger the session start, separated with comma (e.g., drugs, medicine). Keywords are combined with OR logic; the LIKE operator is applied to the typed keywords (if drug is written, then drugstore will trigger the session start). Empty KeystrokeFiltering Keystroke filtering during monitoring. If the value is disabled, the keystroke filtering is disabled and all applications are monitored. If the value is include, the keystroke filtering is enabled in the Include mode, and only applications listed in KeystrokeFilteringAppNames or KeystrokeFilteringAppTitles are monitored. If the value is exclude, the keystroke filtering is enabled in the Exclude mode, and only applications not listed in KeystrokeFilteringAppNames or KeystrokeFilteringAppTitles are monitored. Disabled 134

135 Parameter Description Default Value KeystrokeFilteringAp pnames KeystrokeFilteringAp ptitles The list of application names separated with comma (e.g., word.exe, skype.exe). Names are combined with OR logic; the LIKE operator is applied to names (e.g., if word.exe is written then winword.exe will be monitored). The list of application titles separated with comma (e.g., Facebook, Google). Names are combined with OR logic; the LIKE operator is applied to titles (if Facebook is written, then Facebook-Messages will be monitored). Log files Empty Empty MonLogging Creation of monitoring logs on the Client computer. 0 - monitoring logs creation is disabled, 1 - monitoring text log will be created in the LogPath location. Disabled LogPath URLMonitoring The path to the monitoring logs location. Using environment variables (%appdata%, %temp%, etc.) is allowed. URL Monitoring Monitoring of URL addresses. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. C:\Progr amdata\ Ekran System\ MonLogs Enabled MonitorTopDomain Monitoring of top and second-level domain names. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. NOTE: This parameter works only if URLMonitoring=1. Application Filtering Enabled 135

136 Parameter Description Default Value FilterState FilterAppName FilterAppTitle Application filtering during monitoring. If the value is disabled, the application filtering is disabled and all applications are monitored. If the value is include, the application filtering is enabled in the Include mode, and only applications listed in FilterAppName or FilterAppTitle are monitored. If the value is exclude, the application filtering is enabled in the Exclude mode, and only applications not listed in FilterAppName or FilterAppTitle are monitored. The list of application names separated with comma (e.g., word.exe, skype.exe). Names are combined with OR logic; the LIKE operator is applied to names (e.g., if word.exe is written then winword.exe will be monitored). The list of application titles separated with comma (e.g., Facebook, Google). Names are combined with OR logic; the LIKE operator is applied to titles (if Facebook is written, then Facebook-Messages will be monitored). User Filtering Disabled Empty Empty UserFilterState User filtering during monitoring. If the value is disabled, activity of all users is monitored. If the value is include, the user filtering is enabled in the Include mode, and only activity of users listed in UserFilterNames is monitored. If the value is exclude, the user filtering is enabled in the Exclude mode, and only activity of users not listed in UserFilterNames is monitored. Disabled UserFilterNames The list of user names separated with a comma (e.g., work\jane,work\john). Names are combined with OR logic. Using asterisk (*) as name/domain mask is allowed (e.g., *\administrator or *\admin*). Additional options Empty 136

137 Parameter Description Default Value EnableProtectedMod e UpdateAutomatically DisplayClientIcon JumpServerMode The mode of Client work. If the value is 1, the protected mode is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. The Client update mode. If the value is 1, the automatic Client update is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled and the Client requires manual update. The Client tray icon displaying. If the value is 1, the Client tray icon is displayed, if the value is 0 hidden. The Jump Server mode. If the value is 1, the Jump Server mode is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled OfflineClientDetectio n OfflineClientDetectio ninterval OfflineClientNotificat ion The notification about the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period. If the value is 1, the offline Client detection is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. The time period after which the Client will be detected as lost. The list of s to which the notifications will be sent separated with semicolon (;). Disabled 01d00h0 0m Empty Monitoring Time Filtering MonitorTimeFilterSt ate MonitoringDays Filtering the time of recording user activity. If the value is disabled, the user activity is recorded twenty-four seven. If the value is include, the user activity is recorded only on days defined in MonitoringDays and only during hours defined in MonitoringHours. If the value is exclude, the user activity is not recorded on days defined in MonitoringDays and during hours defined in MonitoringHours. The days of the week during which the Client will or will not record users' activity. The days of the week are combined by OR logic. Disabled Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri 137

138 Parameter Description Default Value MonitoringHours IPFilterState IPFilterValue The hours during which the Client will or will not record users' activity. IP Filtering IP filtering during monitoring. If the value is disabled, remote sessions from all IP addresses are monitored. If the value is includepublic, the IP filtering is enabled in the Include mode, and only remote sessions from public IP addresses listed in IPFilterAddresses are monitored. If the value is excludepublic, the IP filtering is enabled in the Exclude mode, and only remote sessions from public IP addresses not listed in IPFilterAddresses are monitored. If the value is includeprivate, the IP filtering is enabled in the Include mode, and only remote sessions from private IP addresses listed in IPFilterAddresses are monitored. If the value is excludeprivate, the IP filtering is enabled in the Exclude mode, and only remote sessions from private IP addresses not listed in IPFilterAddresses are monitored. The list of IP addresses separated with a comma (e.g., , ). IP addresses are combined with OR logic. Using asterisk (*) as a mask is allowed (e.g., *.*). 8:00 18:00 Disabled Empty Authentication Options NotificationMessage EnableNotificationCo mment The message that is displayed on user login to the system. Additional option that requires the user to comment on the additional message displayed on login to the system. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Disabled Disabled 138

139 Parameter Description Default Value RequireTicketNumbe r Additional option that requires the user to enter a valid ticket number of an integrated ticketing system to start working with the Client computer. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Disabled Two-Factor and Secondary Authentication EnableForcedAuth EnableOneTimePass word Additional identification of users that log in to the Client computer with server operation system. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Additional option that allows the user to request a one-time password to get a temporary access. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Disabled Disabled EnableTwoFactorAut h InstallDir The option that requires the user to enter a timebased one-time password to log in. If the value is 1, the option is enabled, if the value is 0 disabled. Advanced Options The path to the Client installation folder. Using environment variables (%appdata%, %temp%, etc.) is allowed. Disabled %Progra mfiles%\ Ekran System\E kran System LocalCacheLimit Size of the Client offline data cache in MB. 500 TenantKey A unique identifier used by Clients to detect the tenant they belong to. <Key value> Generating Windows Client Installation Package To generate an installation package, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 139

140 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Install Clients. 4. On the Computers without Clients page, click Download installation file. 5. On the Installation File Download page, select the Windows option in the drop-down list, and then click Windows Client installation package (.ini +.exe). 6. On the Generate Installation Package page, define the name/ip of the Server to which the Clients will connect, and define the Client configuration to be applied to the Client and then click Next. NOTE: The Server IP address has to be static for Clients to connect to it successfully. Unique external IP addresses should be used for cloud-based Servers. 7. The installation package is successfully created and downloaded to your computer. The download settings depend upon the settings of your browser. Installing Windows Clients Locally with Custom Monitoring Parameters To install the Windows Client locally using the installation package, do the following: 1. Copy the package (the EkranSystemClient.exe installation file and the EkranSystemClient.ini file) to the target computer. 2. Start the EkranSystemClient.exe installation file under the administrator account on the target computer. 3. After the package is deployed, the name of the required computer appears on the Client Management page in the Management Tool. Downloading Windows Client Installation File (.exe) To download the file for Windows Client installation, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Install Clients. 4. On the Computers without Clients page, click Download installation file. 5. On the Installation File Download page, select the Windows option in the drop-down list, and then click Windows Client Installation (.exe). 6. File downloading starts. The download settings depend upon the settings of your browser. 140

141 Installing Windows Clients Locally without.ini File This type of installation allows you to install the Windows Clients with the default configuration. This way you will need only an EkranSystemClient.exe file for Client installation. The EkranSystemClient.ini file with the default parameters will be generated automatically. To install the Windows Client locally using the installation package on the target computer: 1. Copy the downloaded EkranSystemClient.exe file to the target computer and do one of the following: Start the EkranSystemClient.exe installation file under the administrator account on the target computer. Then in the opened window, enter the names and IP addresses of the computer on which the Server is installed and click Install. In the Command Prompt (cmd.exe) started under administrator, enter EkranSystemClient.exe /ServerName=<Server Name>. NOTE. If there is no connection with the server, installation will failed and error message will be displayed. 2. After the package is deployed, the installed Client appears in the list on the Client Management page in the Management Tool. Installation via Third Party Software If you want to install the Windows Client via a third-party tool (e.g., via System Center Configuration Manager, Active Directory, etc.), download the Client installation file and use the following command: EkranSystemClient.exe /ServerName=<Server Name>. The Client will be installed with a default configuration. Installing Windows Client on Amazon WorkSpace To install the Windows Client on Amazon Workspaces, do the following: 1. Download the Client installation file. 2. Connect to the Amazon WorkSpace and run the Client installation file (.exe). 3. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 4. In the Windows Registry Editor, select the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client 5. Select the AgentGUID value and click Delete in the context menu. 6. In the opened confirmation message, click Yes. NOTE: You will not be able to edit the registry values in the Protected Mode. 7. In the Amazon WorkSpaces management console, do the following: Create an image of the Amazon WorkSpace with installed Windows Client. Create a bundle from the newly created image. Create new Amazon WorkSpaces from the newly created bundle. 8. All new Amazon WorkSpaces created from the bundle will automatically connect to the Ekran Server. 141

142 NOTE: Make sure that Ekran Server is allowed to accept TCP connections via 9447 port for connection between Ekran Server and Ekran Clients. loning a Virtual Machine with Installed Client Each Windows Client has its own unique ID, which it receives when it connects to the Server. When you prepare a virtual machine, which is to be monitored, for cloning, you need to remove the Client ID to ensure the proper Client connection to Server. To remove the Client ID, do the following: 1. Make sure the Client is offline (does not have any connection with the Server). 2. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 3. In the Registry Editor window, select the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client 4. Select the AgentGUID value and click Delete in the context menu. 5. In the opened confirmation message, click Yes. NOTE: You will not be able to edit the registry values in the Protected Mode. Each new Client with a new AgentGUID will be displayed as a separate instance in the Management Tool. To avoid displaying multiple Clients, you can run the script below to use the virtual machine name as AgentGUID. The script must be run on each system start. taskkill /f /im ekran* reg delete HKLM\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client /v AgentGUID /f reg delete /v PreviousState /f del "c:\program Files\Ekran System\Ekran System\Client\OfflinePool.dat" /q reg add HKLM\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client /v AgentGUID /t REG_SZ /d %COMPUTERNAME% /f net start EkranClient Unassigning License on Virtual Machine Shutdown If Ekran Windows Client is used on virtual machines, in some cases the master image might be used multiple times. To prevent wasting Client licenses when this occurs, you can either configure the Client license to be unassigned on the virtual machine shutdown or enable the Golden Image mode for the Server. 142

143 Golden Image Mode for the Server If the Golden Image mode is enabled for Ekran System Server, then the Server will automatically unassign a license from the Client when it becomes offline. To enable Golden Image mode for the Server, do the following: 1. Stop the Server by clicking Stop in the context menu of the Server icon in the notification area or find the EkranServer service in the Task Manager and click Stop. 2. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 3. In the Registry Editor window, select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem key. 4. Select Edit > New > DWORD (32-bit) Value and define the following: Value name: GoldenImageMode Value data: 1 5. Start the EkranServer service to continue working with the program. Unassigning License via the Script on the Client Side Before configuring a virtual machine image, you have to create a cmd file (for example, uninstall_client.cmd) containing the following command-line command: start /wait <path to EkranClient.exe> -uninstwl <uninstallation key> For example (default installation parameters used): start /wait C:\Progra~1\EkranS~1\EkranS~1\Client\EkranClient.exe -uninstwl allowed To configure the image of the virtual machine with the Client for the license to be unassigned on shutdown: 1. Start your virtual machine image. 2. Configure the system and install the necessary software. 3. Install Ekran Client (via remote installation or locally) with the Protected Mode option disabled. 4. Open the Windows Registry Editor. 5. In the Registry Editor window, select the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client 6. Select the AgentGUID value and click Delete in the context menu. 7. In the opened confirmation message, click Yes. 8. Copy uninstall_client.cmd to the target folder on your virtual machine. 9. Run the Command Prompt (cmd.exe) as administrator. 10. Enter the gpedit command. 11. In the Local Group Policy Editor window, select Computer Configuration -> Windows Settings -> Scripts (Startup/Shutdown) -> Shutdown 12. In the Shutdown Properties window, click Add and select the uninstall_client.cmd file. 13. Click OK. 14. Create the master snapshot (gold image). 143

144 15. From now on, whenever you start the virtual machine using this image, the Client is going to connect to the Server as a new Client and get a license assigned to it. Whenever the virtual machine is shutdown, the license is going to be unassigned from the Client. NOTE: If you need the license to be unassigned on Logoff, you have to edit the Logoff script in a similar way in the Local Group Policy Editor (User Configuration -> Windows Settings -> Scripts (Logon/Logoff) -> Logoff -> Properties). Updating Windows Clients About Ekran System offers two update options for Windows Clients: - automatic update - update of selected Clients via the Management Tool The automatic Client update is performed when a Windows Client connects to the Server of a newer version. It is recommended to use the automatic Client update. If you want to control the update of target Client computers yourself, you can disable the automatic update on the required Clients and update them via the Management Tool. After the Windows Client is updated, you will still be able to access the monitored data received before its update. NOTE: Windows Clients of very old versions might not be able to update. In this case, you need to re-install the Clients. Windows Client Status after Server Update If the Update Client automatically option is enabled for the Windows Client, it is updated automatically when it connects to the Server of a newer version. If the Update Client automatically option is disabled for the Windows Client and it requires manual update, it is displayed with the icon in the grid on the Clients page. Such Clients store the monitoring data locally. They restart sending monitoring data to the Server after update. Updating Windows Clients Automatically To update a Windows Client automatically, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client that needs to be updated automatically and click Edit Client. 144

145 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, select the Update Client automatically option. 5. Click Finish. 6. The Client will be updated automatically when it connects to the Server of a newer version. Updating Windows Client Manually To update a selected Windows Client via the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client that needs to be updated and click Edit Client. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, clear the Update Client automatically option. 5. Click Finish to save the changes. 6. Update the Server. 7. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client configuration management permission. 8. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 9. On the Clients page, select the Client that needs to be updated and click Edit Client. 10. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, click Update. 11. On its next connection to the Server, the Client will be updated to a newer version. Reconnecting Windows Clients to another Server If you want to reconnect the Windows Clients to another Server, start the remote installation from that Server. The Clients will be reconnected. Please note that this way of reconnection can be used only for the Clients that work in the nonprotected mode. If your Clients work in the protected mode, first disable the protected mode and then reconnect the Clients. Uninstalling Windows Clients About Windows Clients can be uninstalled locally or remotely. It is possible to uninstall the Windows Client locally only with the help of the Uninstallation key. 145

146 After uninstallation, the Client stops sending its data to the Server, but its data is not deleted from the Server and the Client is displayed in the Management Tool. The Client status in the Management Tool becomes offline after uninstallation. To delete the Client from the Server (with all its captured data) and from the Management Tool, follow the steps described in the Deleting the Client section. Client Uninstallation Key During the Server installation, it is possible to define the Client Uninstallation key. By default, this key is allowed. The Client Uninstallation key is used during the local Client uninstallation. The user is able to view or change the Client Uninstallation key in the Management Tool. If you change the Uninstallation key, the Windows Client will receive it after connection to the Server. If the Client has not connected to the Server yet, then its Uninstallation key is allowed. If the Client has not connected to the Server after the Uninstallation key has been changed, the Client has to be uninstalled with the help of an old Uninstallation key. To change the uninstallation key, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client uninstallation permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Uninstallation Key. 4. On the Custom Uninstall Key page, enter the new uninstallation key in the New Key field. 5. Re-enter the new uninstallation key in the Confirm Key field and then click Save. 6. The uninstallation key is changed. Uninstalling Windows Clients Remotely To uninstall a Windows Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client uninstallation permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client you want to uninstall and click Edit Client. 4. On the Editing Client page on the Properties tab, click Uninstall Client. NOTE: This option is not displayed if the Client is already uninstalled or you do not have the Client uninstallation permission for it. 5. In the confirmation message, click Uninstall. 6. The Client is uninstalled. To uninstall several Windows Clients, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client uninstallation permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select Uninstall Clients. 146

147 4. On the Client Uninstallation page, click Add Clients to list. 5. The page with the Clients for which you have the Client uninstallation permission opens. 6. Select the Clients that you want to uninstall and click Next. To find a specific Client, enter its name or a part of its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 7. Make sure you have added all necessary Clients to the uninstallation list and click Uninstall. 8. The selected Clients are uninstalled. Uninstalling Windows Clients Locally It is possible to uninstall the Windows Client locally only with the help of the Uninstallation key that is defined during the Server installation or in the Management Tool. To uninstall the Windows Client locally, do the following: 1. Run the Command Prompt (cmd.exe) as administrator. 2. In the Command Prompt, go to the Client installation folder. By default, it is located here: C:\Program Files\Ekran System\Ekran System 3. Enter the following command: UninstallClient.exe /key=<uninstallation key> /silent=true. 4. Press Enter. 5. The Client is successfully uninstalled. NOTE: If you do not add the /silent=true parameter to the uninstallation command, the confirmation message for uninstalling the Client will be displayed on the Client computer. Viewing Windows Clients Windows Clients are displayed in groups on the Client Management page. If the user has an administrative Client installation and management permission, they will see all Clients. In other case, the user will see only those Clients for which they have at least one Client permission. The list of Clients contains the following information: Client name Status Type Domain IPv4 IPv6 Description Please note, if there are several network cards on the Client computer, only those IPv4 and IPv6 addresses used by Windows Clients will be displayed in the Management Tool. You can filter Windows Clients in the following ways: 147

148 To sort Clients by the type of operating system, click the Type column header. To find Windows Clients only, select Hide Linux Clients and Hide macos Clients and click Apply Filters. To find Clients by their host name or description, enter the name/description or a part of it in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. To hide offline/online/uninstalled/licensed Clients, select the corresponding option in the Filtering pane and click Apply Filters. On the Client Management page you have the following options: Add Client Group, Install Clients, Manage Licenses, Edit Uninstallation Key, Uninstall Clients, Delete Clients, Edit Client Configuration and Edit Client Groups. The number of available options depends upon permissions. Windows Client Description Client description is used as additional information about your Windows Clients, which makes it easier to find a specific Client. You can filter your Clients by their descriptions as well as by their names. Client description can be defined on the Editing Client page on the Properties tab. To edit the description for the Windows Client, enter it in the Description box and click Finish. Windows Client Configuration About Windows Client Configuration includes its monitoring parameters (screenshot creation, keystrokes logging, Client mode, etc.). The Client configuration can be defined in the.ini file, which is included to the installation package. You can set the Client configuration during remote installation and during Client editing. Protected Mode Parameter The Windows Client can work in two modes: Non-protected mode: a regular mode without enhanced Client security. Protected mode: a mode with enhanced Client security: the user is not able to edit Client data (log files, generated screenshots, etc.), edit Client settings in the registry, edit/remove/modify/rename Client files (*.exe and *.dlls). The protected mode can be enabled when installing, updating, or editing the Client. If the protected mode is enabled during Client installation, this change will come into effect immediately. 148

149 If the protected mode is enabled during Client editing, this change will come into effect after the computer is rebooted. NOTE: It is impossible to reconnect the Client working in protected mode to another Server. In such situation, you will have to uninstall the Client locally or change its mode to nonprotected. Automatic Client Update Parameter If the Update Client automatically option is enabled, the Client will be updated automatically when it connects to the Server of a newer version. If the option is disabled, the Client needs to be updated manually via the Management Tool. Windows Clients requiring manual update store the monitoring data locally. After they are updated to a newer version, they restart sending monitoring data to the Server. Client Tray Icon Parameter The Client tray icon is displayed to notify the users that their actions are being monitored when they log into the Client computer and while they are working on it. This feature can be enabled during Clients installation and editing in the Management Tool. If the Display Client tray icon option is enabled, the Client will display a tray notification to inform the logged-in users that they are being monitored by a Server. Jump Server Parameter The Jump Server mode is used to provide users temporary access to the particular computer or computer group without revealing credentials. If the jump server mode is enabled, the Client will be a jump server for remote access via privileged accounts (PASM). Please note that this feature is available only for the Clients with the Terminal Server license. Offline Clients Detection Parameter The offline Client detection parameter allows you to receive an notification about the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period. Such Clients are called lost. NOTE: The Offline Clients Detection parameter is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. If the Notify if the Client is offline for more than option is enabled, define the time period after which the Client will be detected as lost. By default, it is set to 1 day. If you want to receive an notification, define an address. You can define several addresses separating them with a semicolon (;). If you don t want to receive an notification, leave this field empty. 149

150 To view the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period ( lost Clients), click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left and open the Offline clients tab. Custom Path for Client Installation Folder Parameter During remote Client installation or generation of Client installation package, you can define a custom path for the Client installation folder. You can use the environment variables (%programfiles%, %appdata%, %temp%, etc.). If the defined location is not accessible or writeprotected, the Client is installed to <systemdisk>\program Files\Ekran System\Ekran System. Offline Cache Size Parameter If there is no connection with the Server, the Client writes monitoring data to a local cache and automatically sends it to the Server as soon as the connection is restored. The Offline cache size (MB) parameter allows you to define the size of the Client offline cache. It can be defined during remote Client installation or generation of Client installation package. The default value is 500 MB. When the amount of monitoring data reaches the defined limit, the Client stops writing to the offline cache. You can adjust the Offline cache size (MB) value via the Windows Registry Editor any time by selecting the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client key and modifying the LocalCaсheLimit value. User Activity Recording Parameters Screenshots and associated metadata like an active window title, URL, text data, etc. are the main results of the Windows Client monitoring. You can define the following user activity recording parameters for the Client: Screenshot settings: o o Enable screenshot creation along with user activity recording: This option allows you to enable the screenshot creation. If this option is not selected on the Client, only metadata (active window title, URL, text data, etc.) will be monitored and recorded. Capture active window only: By default, screenshots of the complete screen are created. If this option is selected, only the current active window will be displayed on a screenshot. It is recommended to use this option along with the application filtering to fully prevent sensitive data from being monitored. 150

151 o Bit depth: By default, screenshots are grayscale with 4 bit colour depth. This guarantees the smallest database size with a normal screenshot quality. You can also set colour depth to 8 bits or 24 bits. Frequency settings for user activity recording: These options allow you to define how often the user activity on the Client computer will be captured. User activity recording can be can be triggered by the following events: o o o o Time interval: User activity is captured with a certain time interval, irrespective to whether something changes on the screen or not. The minimal time interval is 30 seconds. Active window change User activity is captured on the change of the active window. For example, a new window opens (program starts), a new tab in the browser opens, any secondary window opens, etc. (influences the keystroke logging as well). Active window title change: User activity is captured on the change of the name of the active window (influences the keystroke logging as well). Clicking or key pressing: User activity is captured on each mouse click or keyboard key pressing. Please note, by default, in this mode, the recorded user activity is sent not oftener than once in 3 seconds to avoid affecting the performance of the Client computer and database size increasing. Keystroke Logging Parameter If Enable keystroke logging option is enabled, the Windows Client logs users keystrokes. Keystrokes are not displayed in the Session Viewer, but they can be used to perform search or set an alert. The Windows Client logs the following types of keystrokes: 151

152 Character keys: Keys that contain alphabet symbols (upper or lower case), numerals (0-9), all kinds of punctuation symbols, and space. Modifiers: This group of keys includes Control key, Shift key, Alt key, and Windows key. Navigation and typing modes: The arrow keys, Home/End, Page Up/Page Down, Tab, Insert, Delete/Backspace, Enter, and Lock keys (Num Lock, Scroll Lock, and Caps Lock). System commands: Print Screen, Menu, Escape, and Break/Pause key. Function keys: Keys that perform some functions, such as printing or saving files. Usually, they are labelled as F1- F12 and are located along the top of the keyboard. Start Monitoring on Keyword Parameter If the Start monitoring after detecting one of the following keywords option is enabled, the Client starts recording the user activities only after the user enters one of the specified keywords. The Client continues recording the user activities until the session is finished. A new session will be recorded after detecting one of the specified keywords again. For the sessions start to be triggered by specific words or phrases, define them separating from each other with comma (,), semicolon (;), or paragraph. The words in phrases must be always separated with spaces. Keystroke Filtering Parameter Keystrokes filtering allows you to reduce the amount of information received from the Windows Client and grant that there is no privacy violation by defining applications where keystrokes will be monitored. The Keystrokes filtering can be in one of three states: Disabled: Keystrokes in all applications are monitored. Include: Keystrokes only in predefined applications are monitored. This mode allows you to enable keystrokes monitoring only in the important applications. Exclude: Keystrokes in all applications except predefined ones are monitored. This mode allows you to skip keystroke monitoring in non-suspicious applications or applications that must not be monitored due to regulations. The applications are identified by name or active window title. Both parameters are combined with OR logic, i.e., if activity meets at least one of conditions, it s recorded in the Include mode or skipped in the Exclude mode. Detect system IDLE event Parameter If the Detect system IDLE event option is enabled, the idle event is registered in two cases: On computers with Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2008: If the user is 152

153 inactive for more than 15 minutes, computer is in sleep or hibernation modes, or the screen is set to be turned off automatically. On computers with Windows XP and Windows Server 2003: If the computer is in sleep or hibernation modes, or the screen is set to be turned off automatically. Register IDLE event Parameter If the Register IDLE event when user is inactive option is enabled, the idle event is registered when there is no Client activity, i.e. mouse moving and key pressing more than the Timeout (min) value. The default timeout is 15 minutes. Clipboard Monitoring Parameter The clipboard monitoring allows you to monitor the Cut, Copy, and Paste operations performed on the Client computers. If the Enable clipboard monitoring option is enabled, the Client logs the text data, which has been copied or cut, and then pasted by using either the context menu commands or such key combinations as Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Ins, Ctrl+X, Shift+Del, etc. The logged text data is displayed in the Text Data column in the Session Player. For more information, see the Viewing clipboard text data chapter. Monitoring Log Parameter Monitoring logs are text files created on the Client computer. If the Enable creating log files of the monitored events option is enabled, two log files will be created on the Client computer: Client_<yyyy_mm_dd>: The log includes the following information on monitored activities on the Client computer: activity time, session ID, Client computer name (host name), user name, activity title, and application name. Login_<yyyy_mm_dd>: The log includes the following information on all user logins to the Client computer: login time, Client computer name (host name), and user name. Both logs are stored in the user defined location. You can use the environment variables (%appdata%, %temp%, etc.) when defining the path. If this location is not accessible or write-protected, logs are saved to <systemdisk>\programdata\ekran System\MonLogs. If you change the log files location via the Management Tool, the new log files will be created in the defined location and the old log files (if any) will remain in the previous location. NOTE: Please do not confuse monitoring logs with Client activity logs (service logs for internal use) stored in <client installation folder>\activitylogs. 153

154 Parameters examples:.ini File Parameters Parameters Set in Management Tool Do not create monitoring logs [ActivityLogsParameters] MonLogging=0 LogPath= On the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, make sure that the Enable creating log files of the monitored events option is not selected. Create monitoring logs in the default location %ProgramData%\EKRAN\MonLogs [ActivityLogsParameters] MonLogging=1 LogPath= On the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, make sure that the Enable creating log files of the monitored events option is selected. Create monitoring logs in the C:\1\Logs folder [ActivityLogsParameters] MonLogging=1 LogPath=C:\1\Logs On the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, do the following: 1. Select the Enable creating log files of the monitored events option. 2. In the Log files creation field, type C:\1\Logs. Create monitoring logs in the <current user profile>\appdata\ekran_logs [ActivityLogsParameters] MonLogging=1 LogPath=%AppData%\EKRAN_Logs On the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, do the following: 1. Select the Enable creating log files of the monitored events option. 2. In the Log files creation field, type =%AppData%\EKRAN_Logs. URL Monitoring Parameters The URL monitoring option enables recording the text entered in the browser address line at the moment of screenshot creation and allows the investigator to receive information about websites visited by the user of the Client computer. This feature also allows you to set an alert to send notifications each time when the user opens the forbidden URL. 154

155 The monitored URL addresses are displayed in the Management Tool on the Session Viewer page in the URL column and in the Details pane. There are several restrictions for the URL monitoring option in the current version of the program: Only URLs from the standard browsers (Firefox, Chrome, Opera, and Internet Explorer) are monitored. URLs from Metro versions of browsers Chrome/Internet Explorer are not monitored. URLs entered in web anonymizers are not monitored. Please note that proxy server anonymizers are supported. If there is no address line in the browser (e.g., due to user s settings), URLs are not monitored. Unicode symbols in domain names (e.g., Russian) are not monitored. If the Enable URL monitoring option is selected in the Management Tool, you can also select the Monitor top and second-level domain names only option. In this case only the main part of the URL (e.g., example.com) will be monitored. Parameters examples:.ini File Parameters [AgentParameters] URLMonitoring=0 MonitorTopDomain=0 [AgentParameters] URLMonitoring=1 MonitorTopDomain=0 [AgentParameters] URLMonitoring=1 MonitorTopDomain=1 Parameters Set in Management Tool On the Editing Client page, on the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, clear the Enable URL monitoring option. On the Editing Client page, on the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, select the Enable URL monitoring option. On the Editing Client page, on the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, select the Enable URL monitoring option, then select the Monitor top and second-level domain names only option. Example of monitored data (activity title) John Doe - Google Chrome John Doe - Google Chrome (URL: John.doe) John Doe - Google Chrome (URL: 155

156 Application Filtering Parameters Application filtering allows you to reduce the amount of information received from the Windows Client by defining applications whose data will be skipped during the monitoring. The Application filtering can be in one of three states: Disabled: User activity in all applications is monitored (screenshots are created and keystrokes are logged). Include: User activity in predefined applications is monitored. Information on all other activity is skipped. This mode allows you to enable monitoring only of the important applications. Exclude: User activity in all applications except predefined ones is monitored. This mode allows you to skip information about user activity in non-suspicious applications (for example, Word). The applications are identified by name or window title. Both parameters are combined with OR logic, i.e., if activity meets at least one of conditions, it s recorded in the Include mode or skipped in the Exclude mode. Application filtering is recommended to be used along with the enabled Capture active window only option to fully prevent sensitive data from being monitored. Parameters examples:.ini File Parameters Parameters Set in Management Tool Monitor all data without applying filters [FilterParameters] FilterState=disable FilterAppTitle= FilterAppName= On the Application Filtering tab, in the Filter State box, select Disabled. Monitor only data from all applications containing Facebook or Gmail in the title [FilterParameters] FilterState=include FilterAppTitle=Facebook,Gmail FilterAppName= On the Application Filtering tab, do the following: In the Filter State box, select Monitor only activity matching defined parameters. In the Active window title contains box, type Facebook, Gmail. Monitor only data from all applications containing Firefox or Internet in the application names 156

157 .ini File Parameters [FilterParameters] FilterState=include FilterAppTitle= FilterAppName=Firefox,Internet Parameters Set in Management Tool On the Application Filtering tab, do the following: 1. In the Filter State box, select Monitor only activity matching defined parameters. 2. In the Application name contains box, type Firefox, Internet. Monitor only data from applications containing Firefox, Chrome or Internet in the application names (any title) and applications with the Facebook word in the title (any name) [FilterParameters] FilterState=include FilterAppTitle=Facebook FilterAppName=Firefox,Chrome,Internet On the Application Filtering tab, do the following: 1. In the Filter State box, select Monitor only activity matching defined parameters. 2. In the Active window title contains box, type Facebook. 3. In the Application name contains box, type Firefox, Chrome, Internet. Monitor all data except data from applications containing words Work or Doc in the title [FilterParameters] FilterState=exclude FilterAppTitle=work,doc FilterAppName= On the Application Filtering tab, do the following: 1. In the Filter State box, select Monitor all activity except. 2. In the Active window title contains box, type Work, doc. Monitor all data except data from applications containing words Word or Excel in the application names [FilterParameters] FilterState=exclude FilterAppTitle= FilterAppName=word,excel On the Application Filtering tab, do the following: 1. In the Filter State box, select Monitor all activity except. 2. In the Application name contains box, type Word, Excel. 157

158 .ini File Parameters Parameters Set in Management Tool Monitor all data except data from applications containing the Word word in the application name or the doc word in the title [FilterParameters] FilterState=exclude FilterAppTitle=doc FilterAppName=word On the Application Filtering tab, do the following: 1. In the Filter State box, select Monitor all activity except. 2. In the Active window title contains box, type doc. 3. In the Application name contains box, type Word. User Filtering Parameters User filtering allows you to reduce the amount of information received from the Windows Client by defining computer users whose data will be skipped during the monitoring. User filtering affects both primary and secondary users. The User filtering can be in one of three states: Disabled: Activity of all users is monitored. Include: Activity of predefined users is monitored. Information on the activity of all other users is skipped. Exclude: Activity of all users except predefined ones is monitored. This mode allows you to skip information about the activity of particular users (for example, administrator). You can define user names for filtering entering them manually or by clicking Add Users and selecting users from the list. When you enter user names manually, they must be entered as <domain name>\<user name> and separated with comma (,), semicolon (;), or paragraph. You can also use asterisk (*) as name/domain mask (e.g., *\administrator or *\admin*). When you click Add Users, the Adding Users page opens. Please note, only those users whose activities have already been monitored are listed. Select the user names to be added and click Add selected. 158

159 NOTE: If you select a user with the Forced User Authentication on the Adding Users page e.g., WORK\janet (jan), you need to change parentheses in the User names box to semicolon, i.e., WORK\janet;jan. Parameters examples:.ini File Parameters Parameters Set in Management Tool Monitor all user activity without applying filters [FilterParameters] UserFilterState=disable UserFilterNames= On the User Filtering tab, in the Filter State box, select Disabled. Monitor only the activity of the janet user or joe user in the work domain [FilterParameters] UserFilterState=include UserFilterNames=WORK\janet;WORK\joe On the User Filtering tab, do the following: In the Filter State box, select Monitor only activity of selected users. In the User names box, enter work\janet,work\joe manually or select the users from the list. Monitor the activity of all users except the users with administrator login (both local and domain) [FilterParameters] UserFilterState=exclude UserFilterNames=*\administrator On the User Filtering tab, do the following: In the Filter State box, select Monitor activity of all users except. In the User names box, enter *\administrator, using asterisk (*) as a name/domain mask Monitor only the activity of the janet Ekran system user name used for secondary authentication [FilterParameters] UserFilterState=include UserFilterNames=WORK\janet;janet On the User Filtering tab, do the following: In the Filter State box, select Monitor only activity of selected users. 159

160 .ini File Parameters Parameters Set in Management Tool In the User names box, enter work\janet;janet manually or select the user from the list. Monitoring Time Filtering Parameters Monitoring time filtering allows you to reduce the amount of information received from the Windows Client by defining the days of the week and hours during which the Client will record the user activity. The Monitoring time filtering can be in one of three states: Disabled: User activity is recorded twenty-four seven. Include: User activity is recorded only on defined days of the week and during the defined hours. User activity outside the defined days of the week and hours is not recorded. Exclude: User activity outside the defined days of the week and hours is recorded. User activity is not recorded on defined days of the week and during the defined hours. NOTE: In the.ini file, the monitoring hours must be defined in the 24-hour time format only. Parameters examples:.ini File Parameters Parameters Set in Management Tool Record all user activity without applying filters [FilterParameters] MonitorTimeFilterState=disable MonitoringDays= MonitoringHours= On the Monitoring Time Filtering tab, in the Filter State box, select Disabled. Record user activity only on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday from 8 AM to 6 PM [FilterParameters] MonitorTimeFilterState=include On the Monitoring Time Filtering tab, do the following: 160

161 .ini File Parameters MonitoringDays=Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri MonitoringHours=8:00-18:00 Parameters Set in Management Tool In the Filter State box, select Monitor only during the defined hours. Select the Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday options. In the From drop-down list, select the 8 AM option. In the To drop-down list, select the 6 PM option. Do not record user activity on Friday and Saturday [FilterParameters] MonitorTimeFilterState=exclude MonitoringDays=Fri, Sat MonitoringHours=00:00-23:59 On the Monitoring Time Filtering tab, do the following: In the Filter State box, select Monitor only outside the defined hours. Select the Friday and Saturday options. In the From drop-down list, enter the 12 AM value. In the To drop-down list, enter the 11:59 PM value. IP Filtering Parameters IP filtering allows you to reduce the amount of information received from the Windows Client by defining IP addresses whose remote sessions will not be monitored. NOTE: The IP Filtering parameter is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. The IP filtering can be in one of five states: Disabled: Remote sessions of all IP addresses are monitored. Include (public IP addresses): Remote sessions of predefined public IP addresses are monitored. Information on the remote sessions of all other IP addresses is skipped. Exclude (public IP addresses): Remote sessions of all public IP addresses except predefined ones are monitored. This mode allows you to skip information about the remote sessions of particular public IP addresses. Include (private IP addresses): Remote sessions of predefined private IP addresses are monitored. Information on the remote sessions of all other IP addresses is skipped. Exclude (private IP addresses): Remote sessions of all private IP addresses except predefined ones are monitored. This mode allows you to skip information about the remote sessions of particular private IP addresses. 161

162 You can enter IP addresses or IP ranges in the IPv4 or IPv6 formats separated with comma (,), semicolon (;), or paragraph. You can also use asterisk (*) as a mask (e.g., *.*). Forced User Authentication Parameter Forced User Authentication provides a method for an additional identification of users that log in to the Client computer. If the Enable secondary user authentication on log-in option is enabled, the Client will display the secondary authentication window on the user login to Windows. NOTE: Forced User Authentication can only be enabled during Client editing in the Management Tool. Two-Factor Authentication Parameter Two-Factor Authentication option allows you to require the users to additionally enter the time-based one-time passwords (TOTP) generated via their mobile applications (i.e., Google Authenticator) to log in to the Client computers. If the Enable two-factor authentication option is enabled, the Client will display the additional TOTP window on the user login to Windows. NOTE: Two-Factor Authentication can only be enabled only during Client editing in the Management Tool. Additional Message on User Login Parameter The additional message on user login allows you to inform the user that their actions are being monitored and also notify them about corporate policies or the country law. If the Enable displaying additional message option is enabled, the Client will display the additional notification message on the user login to Windows. After the user confirms acknowledging the message, they will be allowed to log in and continue working. For more information, see the Enable displaying additional message chapter. 162

163 User s Comment Parameter The user s comment option allows you to require the user to comment on the additional message displayed on login in order to allow the Ekran System administrator to be informed about the user activity. The user s comment option is available only if the Enable displaying additional message option is selected. If the Require user s comment option is enabled, the Client will prompt the user to comment on the additional message displayed on login. After the user enters a comment, they will be allowed to start working with the system. For more information, see the Enabling user s comment option chapter. Ticket Number Parameter The ticket number option allows you to require the user to enter a valid ticket number created in the integrated ticketing system to start working with the Client computer. The ticket number option is available only if the Require user s comment option is selected. If the Require ticket number option is enabled, the Client will prompt the user to enter a valid ticket number in the additional message window displayed on login. After the user enters a valid ticket number and comments on the additional message, they will be allowed to start working with the system. NOTE: The Require ticket number option is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. Editing Windows Client Configuration You can edit the Client configuration for online and offline Clients. The configuration for online Clients will be applied immediately. The configuration for offline Clients will be applied as soon as the Client goes online. The newly installed Clients have Custom configuration that can be edited for each Client individually. When the Clients are added to the group, they can either still have their Custom configuration or they can inherit configuration from the group. If the group configuration is changed, the Client configuration that is inherited from this group is changed as well. To edit the Windows Client custom configuration, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Windows Client for which you want to edit the configuration, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. NOTE: If you do not have the Client configuration management permission for this Client, the configuration options will be disabled. 163

164 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, do the following: Optionally, define the description for the Client. Select the type of license to be assigned to the Client. Select the type of settings to be applied to the Client: o If the Custom settings type is selected, you can edit all Client settings. o If the Inherited from <Client group> settings type is selected, the Client settings are inherited from the selected Client group and these settings cannot be changed. Select the Enable protected mode option if you want to enable protected mode. NOTE: The Client mode will be changed after reboot of the Client computer. Select the Update Client automatically option if you want the Client to be updated automatically. Select the Display Client tray icon option if you want to display the Client tray icon to the user. [For Clients with a Terminal Server license] Select the Enable jump server mode option if you want the Client to be a jump server for remote access via privileged accounts (PASM). Select the Notify if the Client is offline for more than option and define the time period after which the Client will be detected as lost if you want to monitor the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period. If you want to receive an notifications about such Clients, define an address. 5. On the User Activity Recording tab, do the following: Define user activity recording frequency. Define the screenshot creation settings. 6. On the Monitoring [Windows/macOS] tab, do the following: 164

165 Select the Enable clipboard monitoring option to enable monitoring of the Windows Clipboard text data. Select the Detect system IDLE event option to enable registering the idle events if the user is inactive for more than 15 minutes, computer is in sleep or hibernation modes, or the screen is set to be turned off automatically. Select the Register IDLE event when user is inactive option to enable the idle event registering when there is no Client activity, i.e. mouse moving and key pressing more than the Timeout (min) value. The default timeout is 15 minutes. Select the Enable creating log files of the monitored events option to enable creation of monitoring logs on the Client computer and define log files location. Select the Enable URL monitoring option to receive information about websites visited by the user of the Client computer. Select the Monitor top and second-level domain names only option to monitor only the main part of the URL (e.g., example.com). 7. On the Application Filtering tab, define the application filtering parameters for the Client. 8. On the User Filtering tab, define the user filtering parameters for the Client. 165

166 9. On the Monitoring Time Filtering tab, define the monitoring time filtering parameters for the Client. 10. On the IP Filtering tab, define the IP filtering parameters for the Client. 11. On the Authentication Options tab, do the following: Select the Enable displaying additional message option if you want to enable additional message on user login, and then enter the message to be displayed to a user. Select the Require user s comment option if you want the user to comment on the additional message displayed on login. Select the Require ticket number option if you want the user to enter a valid ticket number to start working with the system. Select the Enable secondary user authentication on log-in option if you want to enable the additional authorization for users that log in to the Client computer. Select the Allow using one-time password option if you want to allow users to use one-time passwords to login to the Client computer. Then define the address of the administrator to receive users requests. You can define several addresses separating them with a semicolon (;). 166

167 Select the Enable two-factor authentication option if you want to require the users to enter the time-based one-time passwords to log in to the Client computer. 12. On the Keystroke Monitoring tab, do the following: Select the Enable keystroke logging option to enable the keystroke logging. Select the Start monitoring after detecting one of the following keywords option if you want the Client to start recording the user activities only after the user enters one of the specified keywords on the Client computer. Define the keystroke filtering parameters for the Client. 13. After defining the configuration, click Next to proceed to defining Client Groups to which the Client belongs, permissions on working with it, and alerts assigned to the Client. Click Finish to except the changes. 14. A new configuration will be immediately applied to the Client. Viewing Windows Client Configuration The Windows Client configuration can be viewed by a user that has an administrative Client installation and management permission or any Client permission. To view the Windows Client configuration, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the required Client and click Edit Client. 4. On the opened page, you will see the tabs with the corresponding configuration parameters. 167

168 Forced User Authentication on Windows Clients About If the Client is installed on the computer with Windows operating system and several users may use the same account to log in to this computer, it is important to identify the person using the account. The identification can be performed by means of Forced User Authentication, which requires the user to enter additional credentials in the pop-up dialog after logging in. The user can either enter the credentials of the Ekran System user, which has the Access Client computer permission, or use their and the generated one-time password (if such option is enabled for the Client computer). The secondary login will then be displayed in the Client Sessions list in brackets next to the primary login under which the user is logged in to Windows. NOTE: The one-time password feature is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. The forced user authentication works only if there is a connection between the Client computer and the Server computer. If the connection with the Server computer is lost (the Server is unavailable), the pop-up dialog for entering secondary credentials will not be displayed. NOTE: In some situations (e.g., after the forced restart) the Client service does not start during one minute after the computer turning on. In these situations forced authentication will not work. Enabling Forced User Authentication on Windows Client The Forced User Authentication parameter can be set only during Client editing and is available for the Clients installed on the computers with Windows operating system. To enable Forced User Authentication on the Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client for which you want to enable Forced User Authentication, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Authentication Options tab, select the Enable secondary user authentication on log-in option. 5. Optionally, select the Allow using one-time password option and enter the administrator address into the Send s to box. The requests for the one-time passwords will be sent on the specified addresses. You can enter several addresses, separating them with a semicolon (;). 168

169 6. Click Finish. 7. If the Client is installed on Windows Server 2003, the computer must be restarted after enabling or disabling the forced authentication mode. On other Windows versions the forced authentication mode is enabled immediately. NOTE: Forced user authentication does not work on Windows XP operating system. Granting User Permission to Log In To grant an Ekran System user a permission to log in to the Client computer with enabled forced user authentication, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Edit the Active Directory or internal user who will log into the Client computer to the system or add a new one. 3. During the user adding/editing, on the Client Permissions tab, click Edit Permissions for the required Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. In the opened Client Permissions window, select the Access Client computer option and then click Save. 5. Click Finish. Managing One-Time Passwords About The one-time password can be generated either on user s request or without it by the Ekran System user with the Client configuration management permission. 169

170 The one-time password option can be enabled only along with the forced user authentication option during Client editing in the Management Tool. NOTE: The one-time password option is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. Generating One-Time Password Generating One-Time Password on User Request When the user requests a one-time password for logging into the Client computer, the user request is sent to the address of the administrator defined for the Client in the Client configuration. On the Access Management page, on the One-time Password tab, the requested password is displayed with the Requested state. NOTE: For the administrator to receive the requests correctly, make sure that on the Authentication Options tab of the Clients the valid addresses are defined. To generate a one-time password using the link, open the received with a request for a one-time password and click the navigation link for the password generation. The onetime password will be automatically generated and sent to the user s address. To generate a one-time password via the One-Time Passwords page, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the One-Time Passwords tab. 4. On the One-Time Passwords tab, click the Generate link for the user request with the Requested state. 5. The one-time password is automatically generated and sent to the user address. Generating One-Time Password without User Request To generate a one-time password without user request, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the One-Time Passwords tab. 4. On the One-Time Passwords tab, click Generate Password. 5. The One-Time Password Generation window opens. 6. Enter the following parameters and then click Generate: Client name: Select the needed Client from the list. User name: Optionally, enter the user name. 170

171 User s confirmation Define the user address, on which the generated one-time password will be sent. Comment: Enter your own comment or leave the default one. The default comment is Generated without request. 7. The one-time password is generated and sent to the specified address. Viewing One-Time Passwords On the Access Management page, on the One-time Passwords tab, the grid with the following information is displayed: Time Requested: Displays the date and time the one-time password was requested. For one-time passwords, which were generated without the user s request, the N/A value is displayed. Time Generated: Displays the date and time the one-time password was generated. Client Name: Displays the name of the Client computer for which the one-time password was requested or generated. User: Displays the user name of a user for which the one-time password was generated. Login: Displays the name of the user who requested a one-time password to log into the Client computer. User s Displays the user address for the one-time password to be sent to. Generated by: Displays the name of the administrator who generated the one-time password. It is empty for the one-time password with the Requested state. State: Displays the current state of the one-time password. It can be Requested, Generated & Sent, Sending Failed, Used, Expired, or Manually Expired. Time Used: Displays the date and time when the one-time password was used. It is empty for not used passwords that are not expired. For expired passwords, the N/A value is displayed. Comment: Displays the user s comment entered in the Request Password window or admin s comment entered in the One-time Password Generation window. The one-time password can have one of the following states: State Description Possible Actions Requested The user has requested a one-time password, but it has not been generated yet. Generate: Allows autogenerating and sending of the one-time password. Generated The one-time password has been generated and sent to the user, but the user has not used it yet and the password has not auto-expired. Expire: Allows terminating a one-time password manually. Resend Allows resending the previously sent

172 State Description Possible Actions Sending Failed The one-time password has been generated, but the sending has failed. Expire: Allows terminating a one-time password manually. Resend Allows resending the previously sent . Used The one-time password has been generated and sent to the user, and the user has used it. Open Session: Allows opening a session of the user logged into the Client computer with a onetime password. Expired The one time password has been generated and sent to the user, but the user has not used it during 24 hours. Manually Expired The generated one-time password has been manually terminated by the administrator. Resending the To resend the with the generated one-time password, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the One-time Passwords tab. 4. On the One-Time Passwords tab, click the Resend link for the target one-time password. 5. In the confirmation message, click OK. 6. A new one-time password is generated and sent to the user s address. NOTE: You can resend the s with one-time passwords with the Generated & Sent or Sending Failed states only. Terminating One-Time Password Manually In case, the one-time password has been generated for the wrong user or sent to the wrong address, you can terminate it manually. To terminate a one-time password manually, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 172

173 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the One-time Passwords tab. 4. On the One-time Passwords tab, click the Expire link for the target one-time password. NOTE: You can manually terminate the one-time passwords with the Generated & Sent or Sending Failed states only. 5. In the confirmation message, click OK. 6. The state of the one-time password changes to Manually Expired and the user will not be able to use it. Logging In Logging in Using Ekran System User Additional Credentials The process of logging in to the Client computer with enabled forced user authentication is performed as follows: 1. The user logs in to Windows in a common way (locally or remotely). 2. On the user login to Windows, the Client displays the secondary authentication window requesting a user to enter their secondary credentials. 3. The user enters the credentials of the Ekran System user that has the Access to Client computer permission. 4. These credentials are sent to the Server and the Server returns the response on whether the access to this computer is allowed. If the user has the required permission for the Client computer and their entered credentials are correct, the user is allowed to continue working with the System. In other case, the user will receive a corresponding message. 5. As soon as the user starts working with the system, the Client will start recording their activity and the user s name will be displayed in the Management Tool on the Monitoring Results page in the User name column in brackets: <logged in Windows user> (<forced authentication user>). Logging in Using One-Time Password The process of logging in to the Client computer with enabled forced user authentication and the one-time password option is performed as follows: 1. The user logs in to Windows in a common way (locally or remotely). 2. On the user login to Windows, the Client displays the secondary authentication window requesting a user to enter their credentials or a one-time password. 3. The user enters their address into the Login box and the one-time password received via into the Password box. 4. These credentials are sent to the Server and the Server returns the response on whether the access to this computer is allowed. If the entered address and the one-time password are correct and the one-time password was generated for this Client computer 173

174 and for this primary Windows user, the user is allowed to continue working with the System. In other case, the user will receive a corresponding message. 5. As soon as the user starts working with the system, the Client will start recording their activity and the user s will be displayed in the Management Tool in the Client Sessions list in the User name column in brackets: <logged in Windows user> (<user s address>). NOTE: After the one-time password has been used, it is automatically terminated and cannot be used to log into the Client computer again Requesting One-Time Password While logging into the Client computer with the enabled forced user authentication and a onetime password option, the user can request a one-time password to get a temporary access to the Client computer, as follows: 1. In the secondary authentication window, the user clicks Request Password. 2. In the opened Request Password window, the user enters their address and then, optionally, enters a comment to be displayed to the administrator. 3. The user clicks Request. 4. The request is sent to the Ekran System administrators addresses defined for the Client while turning on the one-time password option. 5. The administrator will generate a one-time password and the generated password will be sent to the address defined in the Request Password window. 6. In a while, the user checks the box for with the generated password. In case the with the generated password has not been received, the user can request it again. NOTE: The one-time password for logging into the same Client computer cannot be requested more often than once per hour. The received one-time password can be used only once during 24 hours since its generation and only for logging into the Client computer from which it has been requested. If the user does not use a one-time password during 24 hours, it automatically expires. Login Approved by Administrator About The Administrator s Approval on Login feature allows you to better protect the Client computers from undesired access. You can create a list of users whose access to the Client computers will be restricted. Such users will be able to log in to the Client computers only with the approval of the administrator. The Administrator s Approval on Login feature works for computers with Windows operating system. 174

175 Approving User Access on Login To ensure that particular users are able to log into the Windows Client computers only after the additional approval, do the following: 1. Define the administrator s address (one or several), to which the access requests will be sent. 2. Define the list of the restricted users required to get the administrator s approval. The users will be required to get approval when logging into all Client computers. 3. In the sent to the defined address, grant or forbid the user the access to the Client computer. Defining Address for User Access Approval To define the administrator s address, to which the access requests will be sent, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 3. On the Configuration page, open the sending settings tab. 4. On the sending settings tab, define the administrator s address under Administrator . You can define several addresses separating them with a semicolon (;). 5. Click Save. Managing Restricted User List Adding User to Restricted List To add a user whose login into Windows Client computers must be approved by the administrator, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Restricted Users tab and then click Add User. 4. In the Add User window, select the user type and define the following information: For Active Directory user, define the domain name and the user or user group login. For Local computer user, define the computer name and user login. For Ekran user for secondary authentication, define the user login. 5. In the Accessed Computer with Installed Client group, select one of the following options: To restrict access to any computer, select Any computer. To restrict access to specified computer or computer group, select Selected computer and define the domain name and the name of computer/computer group in it. To restrict access to computers of the specific Client Group, select Computers from Client Group and define the Client Group. 175

176 NOTE: Access will be restricted only for the computers with the installed Clients. 6. In the Restriction Type group, select the to Administrator option. 7. Click Save. 8. The user is added to the grid. During the next login, they will be able to start working with the Windows Client computers only with the approval of the administrator. Deleting User from Restricted List To allow a user to log into Windows Client computers without administrator s approval, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Restricted Users tab. 4. Click Delete user for the required user and then click OK in the confirmation message. 5. The user is deleted from the list and will be able to log in to Windows Client computers without administrator s approval. Logging In The process of logging into the Client computer with the approval of the administrator is performed as follows: 1. The user logs in to the Windows computer with installed Client in a common way (locally or remotely). 2. If Forced User Authentication is enabled, the user enters their secondary credentials. 3. If the additional message on login is enabled, the user acknowledges it. Additionally, if the corresponding options are enabled, the user comments on the message and enters a valid ticket number. 4. An with the request and user information is sent to the defined address. The administrator receives an with the request. 5. In the received , the administrator clicks the Grant access hyperlink to allow the user to log in. If the user is not allowed to log in, the administrator clicks the Block access hyperlink and the user is logged out. Restricting User Access by Time About The Restricted User Access by Time feature allows you to better protect the Client computers from access at undesired time. You can create a list of users whose access to the Client computers will be granted for a certain period of time. Such users will be able to log in to the Client computers only during this time period and will be forcibly logged out after it. 176

177 NOTE: The Restricting User Access by Time feature is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. Granting Access for a Certain Period of Time To add a user whose login into Windows Client computers must be allowed only during a certain period of time, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Restricted Users tab and then click Add User. 4. In the Add User window, select the user type and define the following information: For Active Directory user, define the domain name and the user or user group login. For Local computer user, define the computer name and user login. For Ekran System user for secondary authentication, define the user login. 5. In the Accessed Computer with Installed Client group, select one of the following options: For the Ekran System user for secondary authentication, to restrict access to any computer, select Any computer. For the Active Directory user and Ekran System user for secondary authentication, to restrict access to specified computer or computer group, select Selected computer and define the domain name and the name of computer/computer group in it. For the Active Directory user and Ekran System user for secondary authentication, to restrict access to computers of the specific Client Group, select Computers from Client Group and define the Client Group. NOTE: Access will be restricted only for the computers with the installed Clients. 6. In the Restriction Type group, select Time interval and define the time period during which the access to the Windows Client computers will be allowed. 7. Click Save. 8. The user is added to the grid. During the next login, they will be able to start working with the Windows Client computers only during the defined time period. Deleting User from Restricted List To allow a user to log into Windows Client computers any time, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Restricted Users tab. 4. Click Delete user for the required user and then click OK in the confirmation message. 5. The user is deleted from the list and will be able to log in to Windows Client computers any time. 177

178 Privileged User Accounts and Session Management (PASM) About If you want to provide users temporary access to the particular computer or computer group without revealing credentials, you can add a privileged user. This feature is available if you have the Enterprise license for Ekran System and the Terminal license for Clients from which users will get access to protected computers (Jump Servers). Account credentials of shared privileged accounts are automatically generated and stored in a password vault. The passwords are encrypted with the RSA key stored in the Certificate Storage on the Server and auto-changed every 24 hours until the account is deactivated. The passwords are also reset every time after the account expiration. It allows enhancing data access security. 178

179 Using Privileged User Accounts To use the Privileged Accounts feature, do the following: 1. Make sure that you have Enterprise license activated. 2. Configure the password vault. NOTE: You can use MS SQL Express for a password vault. 3. On the Configuration page, LDAP Target tab, define the administrator credentials for the domain in which shared accounts will be created. These credentials will be encrypted and saved to the password vault. 4. Select the Enable jump server mode option for the Client with the assigned Terminal Server license. 5. Add a privileged user. 6. The shared account for access to the defined computer/computer group will be automatically created in the selected domain. Its credentials will be stored in the password vault in the encrypted format. 7. Now, the user can work with the protected computers using the remote desktop connection under the created privileged user account. Password Vault Configuration Password vault is an SQL database for storing encrypted credentials of the shared accounts used for privileged access. 179

180 NOTE: Even if Ekran System uses the Firebird database or the PostgreSQL database, the password vault has to be the MS SQL or MS SQL Express database. To configure a password vault, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database Management permission. 2. Click the Database Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Password Vault tab, select Use password vault. 4. Define the instance, database name, user, and password of the SQL database to be used as a password vault. 5. Click Save. Defining Domain Administrator Credentials Domain Administrator credentials are required for creation of shared accounts used for privileged access. To define the domain administrator credentials, do the following: 1. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 2. On the LDAP Targets tab, select the LDAP target for which you want to edit the configuration, and click Edit. 3. Define the domain administrator login and password. 180

181 4. Click Finish. Domain administrator credentials are saved. Adding Privileged User To add a new privileged user, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User Management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Privileged Accounts tab, click Add User. 4. The Privileged Accounts window appears. 181

182 5. Select the user you give access to the computer or computer group. For the Active Directory user, select a user and domain. You can select a user group to give access to all users belonging to it. For the Local computer user, select the user login and computer name. For the Ekran System user for secondary authentication, select the user login. These credentials will be checked if the Forced user authentication is enabled on the target computer. 6. Select a computer or computer group to which user will access using the remote desktop connection (target computers). To do this, select the domain and computer or computer group from the corresponding lists. NOTE: The admin s credentials for the selected domain must be defined. 7. Select a domain group from which the privileged account will inherit permissions (target computers). This must be a user group whose members are allowed to login to the target computers remotely. 8. Define the date when privileged account will be deactivated. 9. Add comment, if necessary. 10. Click Grant Access. 11. The privileged account is generated in the selected domain user group. Its credentials are stored in the password vault and the user can access the selected computers via Ekran System remote access application. 182

183 NOTE: If you select a domain user group as a privileged user, then a separate shared account will be created for each member of this group. Editing Privileged Account Once you created the shared account for the privileged user, there is no way to edit it. You have to delete the record deactivating the account and then create a new one with the edited parameters. Please note that if you created the shared account for the user once, then it will not be re-created but only re-activated with a new password. Deactivating Privileged Account To deactivate the privileged account, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User Management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Privileged Accounts page, click Delete in the selected user row. 4. Click Delete in the confirmation window. 183

184 5. The privileged account of the selected user is deactivated. It can be deleted via Active Directory. Using Privileged Account To access remote computer via Ekran System remote access application, do the following: 1. Login to the Jump Server as a user for whom the shared privileged account has been created. Please note that if the forced user authentication is enabled on the Jump Server, then credentials of the secondary user will be checked. 2. Click Remote Access in the Client tray menu. 3. The Ekran System Remote Access application opens. The drop-down list contains the list of computers to which you have been granted access. If you have been granted access to the computer group, the drop-down list will be empty and you will have to enter the name of the computer or its IP manually. 4. Select the computer from the drop-down list or enter its name/ip, click Connect. 5. The auto-logged remote desktop session under the shared privileged account starts. Viewing Privileged Sessions If the Ekran System is installed only on the jump server, you can view a privileged session as a part of the original Jump Server session. 184

185 If the Client is installed on the protected target computer, you can view the privileged session as a session of the shared account. Informing about Monitoring About If you want the user to be informed that their session will be monitored, you can enable displaying the Client tray icon option in Management Tool. You can also enable the additional message option to set the message to be displayed to a user, who must confirm acknowledging the message in order to log in to the computer. The additional message is displayed when: Windows is started, restarted, or shut down. The user gets logged out or switched. The user logs in via the remote connection. In addition, you can enable the user s comment option, which will require the user to comment on the additional message displayed on login. The entered comments are displayed in the Client Sessions list. If both forced user authentication and additional message features are enabled for the Windows Client, the additional message will be displayed after the user enters the additional credentials in the secondary authentication window. 185

186 The Client tray icon is always displayed to the user. The tray notification is displayed when: The user logs in. The user clicks the icon. NOTE: The additional message and Client tray icon are not displayed for unlicensed Windows Clients. Enabling Displaying Additional Message The additional message displaying can be enabled when editing Client/Client Group configuration and defining the Client settings during the remote installation or Client installation package generation for local installation. By default, the additional message text is: According to company policy you must agree to the terms in order to continue working on this computer. You can enter the custom message to be displayed to users. NOTE: The message can be up to symbols. To enable displaying the additional message when installing the Windows Client, select the Enable displaying additional message option on the Client configuration page (if the Client is to be installed remotely) or on the Generate Installation Package page (if the Client is to be installed via the installation package). When the Client is installed, the user will receive the default notification message on their login until the text of the message is changed when editing the Client. To enable displaying the additional message when editing the Windows Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client for which you want to edit the configuration, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. On the Authentication options tab, select the Enable displaying additional message option, and then, optionally, enter the message to be displayed to a user. 5. Click Finish. Enabling User s Comment Option The user s comment option can be enabled when editing Client/Client Group configuration and defining the Client settings during the remote installation or Client installation package generation for local installation. To enable the user s comment option when installing the Windows Client, select the Enable displaying additional message option and then select the Require user s comment option on 186

187 the Client configuration page (if the Client is to be installed remotely) or on the Generate Installation Package page (if the Client is to be installed via the installation package). To enable the user s comment option when editing the Windows Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client for which you want to edit the configuration, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. On the Authentication options tab, select the Enable displaying additional message option, and then, optionally, enter the message to be displayed to a user. Select the Require user s comment option. 5. Click Finish. Enabling Displaying Client Tray Icon The Client tray icon displaying can be enabled when editing Client/Client Group configuration and defining the Client settings during the remote installation or Client installation package generation for local installation. When the option is enabled, the Client icon is displayed in the notification area of the Client computer. When the user clicks the icon, the notification displayed is the following: Your actions are being monitored by <Server name> To enable displaying the Client tray icon when installing the Windows Client, select the Display Client tray icon option on the Client configuration page (if the Client is to be installed remotely) or on the Generate Installation Package page (if the Client is to be installed via the installation package). When the Client is installed, the notification message will be displayed to the user after their login. To enable displaying the Client tray icon when editing the Windows Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client for which you want to edit the configuration, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. On the Properties tab, select the Display Client tray icon option. 5. Click Finish. The Client tray icon will be displayed on the next user login. Logging In The process of logging in to the Windows Client computer with enabled additional message option is performed as follows: 1. The user logs in to Windows in a common way (locally or remotely). 187

188 2. If the Forced User Authentication is enabled, the Client prompts the user to enter the secondary credential. 3. After the user is logged in, the notification message is displayed. NOTE: If the user logs in to the Citrix XenApp or Microsoft Shared App, the additional message will be shown to them every eight hours. 4. If the Require user s comment option is enabled, the user will be required to comment on the additional message to start working with the Windows Client computer. 5. If the user clicks I Agree, they are allowed to continue working with the system. If the user clicks Cancel, they return to the Windows login screen. 6. If the Client tray icon displaying option is enabled for the Client, the tray notification is displayed to the user. Integration with Ticketing Systems About Integration with ticketing systems allows you to require the users to provide ticket numbers to start working with Windows Client computers. If integration with ticketing systems is enabled, the Client will prompt the user to enter a valid number of the not closed ticket in the additional message window displayed on login. Currently, integration with such ticketing systems as SysAid and ServiceNow is available. If you want Ekran System to be integrated with any other ticketing system, contact our support team: support_team@ekransystem.com. NOTE: The integration with ticketing systems is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. Enabling Ticket Number Option The ticket number option can be enabled when editing Client/Client Group configuration and defining the Client settings during the remote installation or Client installation package generation for local installation. To enable the ticket number option when installing the Windows Client, select the Enable displaying additional message and Require user s comment options and then select the Require ticket number option on the Client configuration page (if the Client is to be installed remotely) or on the Generate Installation Package page (if the Client is to be installed via the installation package). To enable the ticket number option when editing the Windows Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client for which you want to edit the configuration, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 188

189 4. On the Authentication options tab, select the Enable displaying additional message and Require user s comment options, and then the Require ticket number option. 5. Click Finish. Logging In The process of logging in to the Windows Client computer with enabled ticket number option is performed as follows: 1. The user logs in to Windows in a common way (locally or remotely). 2. If the Forced User Authentication is enabled, the Client prompts the user to enter the secondary credential. 3. After the user is logged in, the notification message is displayed. 4. The user enters a valid ticket number, comments on the additional message, and then clicks I Agree to start working with the system. If the user clicks Cancel, they return to the Windows login screen. 5. In the ticketing system, a comment is added to the corresponding ticket. It contains information on who and when logged in to the Client computer. Additionally, it contains the user s comment entered in the additional message window and the link to the user session. 189

190 macos Clients About macos Client is a program that can be installed on the target computers to monitor the activity of their users. The monitored data is sent to the Server and can be viewed via the Session Viewer in the Management Tool. Monitoring via macos Clients The macos Clients work as follows: Each macos Client starts automatically on computer start. A macos Client with a Workstation Client license monitors either one local or remote session. Every time the computer is restarted, the macos Client starts recording user activity in a new session. The maximum duration of one session can be 24 hours. At 00:00 all live sessions are terminated. After their termination (their status changes from Live to Finished), new live sessions automatically start. The session status becomes Finished whenever: the computer is turned off, the user is logged out, or the macos Client is disconnected from the Server. Whenever the macos Client reconnects to the Server, the session status changes from Finished back to Live. If a user works with several monitors, the macos Client creates screenshots from all of them. If there is no connection with the Server, the Client stores the monitored data locally (default folder is /Library/Application Support/Ekran) and automatically sends it to the Server when the connection is restored. It is recommended to have not less than 500MB of free space on the disk where the Client is installed to save data during the offline session. The frequency of user activity recording of the macos Client is the following: o If the user is typing the text, the user activity is recorded every 10 seconds. o If the user clicks a mouse, the user activity is recorded every 3 seconds. o If the user changes an active window, the user activity is recorded every 3 seconds. User activity recording triggers usually influence each other, though the average frequency of user activity recording is higher. 190

191 Installing macos Client About You can install the macos Clients locally using the Client installation file generated in the Management Tool. Downloading macos Client Installation File To download the file for macos Client installation, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Install Clients. 4. On the Computers without Clients page, click Download installation file. 5. On the Installation File Download page, select the MacOS option in the drop-down list, and then click MacOS x64 Client Installation (.tar.gz). 6. File downloading starts. The download settings depend upon the settings of your browser. Installing macos Clients This type of installation allows you to install the macos Clients locally using the downloaded EkranSystemmacOSClientx64.tar.gz package. To install the macos Client on the target computer with a macos operating system from the command line: 1. Make sure that there is only one user logged in to the computer. 2. Copy the installation package to any folder. 3. Run the Terminal. 4. Navigate to the folder with the installation package by entering the following command: cd path/to/folder 5. Unpack the installation package using the following command: tar xvfz <installation package name> 6. Navigate to the unpacked EkranClient folder using the following command: cd EkranClient The EkranClient folder contains the install.sh script used to install the Client. 7. Run the macos Client installation script specifying the Server name or Server IP address and the port used for connection to the Server (9447 is recommended):./install.sh <server_name/ip> <server_port>. 191

192 8. After the end of the installation, macos Client will appear in the list on the Clients page in the Management Tool. Uninstalling macos Clients About macos Clients can be uninstalled locally or remotely. After uninstallation, the Client stops sending its data to the Server, but its data is not deleted from the Server and the Client is displayed in the Management Tool. The Client status in the Management Tool becomes offline after uninstallation. To delete the Client from the Server (with all its captured data) and from the Management Tool, follow the steps described in the Deleting the Client section. Uninstalling macos Clients Remotely To uninstall a macos Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client uninstallation permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client you want to uninstall and click Edit Client. 4. On the Editing Client page on the Properties tab, click Uninstall Client. NOTE: This option is not displayed if the Client is already uninstalled or you do not have the Client uninstallation permission for it. 5. In the confirmation message, click Uninstall. 6. The Client is uninstalled. To uninstall several macos Clients, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client uninstallation permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select Uninstall Clients. 4. On the Client Uninstallation page, click Add Clients to list. 5. The page with the Clients for which you have the Client uninstallation permission opens. 6. Select the Clients that you want to uninstall and click Next. To find a specific Client, enter its name or a part of its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 7. Make sure you have added all necessary Clients to the uninstallation list and click Uninstall. 8. The selected Clients are uninstalled. 192

193 Uninstalling macos Clients Locally To uninstall the macos Client from the command line, do the following: 1. Run the Terminal. 2. Do one of the following: Navigate to the folder with the macos Client by entering the command: sudo cd /Library/Application\ Support/Ekran/EkranAgent. The EkranAgent folder contains the uninstall.sh script used to uninstall the Client. Run the uninstallation script by entering the following command: sudo./uninstall.sh and press Enter. Or Run the uninstallation script by entering the following command: sudo /Library/Application\ Support/Ekran/EkranAgent/uninstall.sh and press Enter. 3. Enter the password of the superuser. 4. macos Client is successfully uninstalled. Viewing macos Clients The macos Clients are displayed in the Management Tool in the Clients list along with the Windows and Linux Clients. If the users have an administrative Client installation and management permission, they will see all Clients. In other case, the users will see only those Clients for which they have at least one Client permission. The Client list contains the following information: Client name Status Type IPv4 IPv6 Description The Domain column is empty for macos Clients. Please note, if there are several network cards on the Client computer, only the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses used by macos Client will be displayed in the Management Tool. You can filter macos Clients in the following ways: To sort Clients by the type of operating system, click the Type column header. To find macos Clients only, select Hide Windows Clients and Hide Linux Clinets and click Apply Filters. To find Clients by their host name or description, enter the name/description or a part of it in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 193

194 To hide offline/online/uninstalled/licensed Clients, select the corresponding option in the Filtering pane and click Apply Filters. macos Client Description Client description is used as additional information about your macos Clients, which makes it easier to find a specific Client. You can filter your Clients by their descriptions as well as by their names. Client description can be defined on the Editing Client page on the Properties tab. Only users with the Client configuration and management permission can edit the macos Client description. To edit the description for the macos Client, enter it in the Description box and click Finish. macos Client Configuration About macos Client Configuration includes its monitoring parameters (URL monitoring, frequency setting for user activity record ing, etc.). User Activity Recording Parameters Screenshots and associated metadata like an active window title, application name, URL, etc. are the main results of the macos Client monitoring. You can define the following user activity recording parameters for the Client: Screenshot settings: o o o Enable screenshot creation along with user activity recording: This option allows you to enable the screenshot creation. If this option is not selected on the Client, only metadata (active window title, application name, URL, etc.) will be monitored and recorded. Capture active window only: By default, screenshots of the complete screen are created. If this option is selected, only the current active window will be displayed on a screenshot. Bit depth: By default, screenshots are grayscale with 4 bit colour depth. This guarantees the smallest database size with a normal screenshot quality. You can also set colour depth to 8 bits or 24 bits. Frequency settings for user activity recording: These options allow you to define how often the user activity on the Client computer will be captured. User activity recording can be can be triggered by the following events: o Time interval: User activity is captured with a certain time interval, irrespective to whether something changes on the screen or not. The minimal time interval is 30 seconds. 194

195 o o o Active window change User activity is captured on the change of the active window. For example, a new window opens (program starts), a new tab in the browser opens, any secondary window opens, etc. Active window title change: User activity is captured on the change of the name of the active window. Clicking or key pressing: User activity is captured on each mouse click or keyboard key pressing. Please note, in this mode, the recorded user activity is sent not oftener than once in 3 seconds to avoid affecting the performance of the Client computer and database size increasing. URL Monitoring Parameters The URL monitoring option allows the investigator to receive information about websites visited by the user on the Client computer. This feature also allows you to set an alert to send notifications each time when the user opens the forbidden URL. The monitored URL addresses are displayed in the Management Tool on the Session Viewer page in the URL column and in the Details pane. There are several restrictions for the URL monitoring option in the current version of the program: Only URLs from the standard browsers (Safari, Chrome) are monitored. URLs entered in web anonymizers are not monitored. Please note that proxy server anonymizers are supported. If there is no address line in the browser (e.g., due to user s settings), URLs are not monitored. Unicode symbols in domain names (e.g., Russian) are not monitored. If the Enable URL monitoring option is selected in the Management Tool, you can also select the Monitor top and second-level domain names only option. In this case only the main part of the URL (e.g., example.com) will be monitored. 195

196 Linux Clients About The Linux Client is a program that can be installed on the target computers to monitor the activity of their users in the terminal. The monitored data is sent by the Linux Client to the Server and can be viewed via the Session Viewer in the Management Tool. Optionally, during the Linux Client installation, you can enable monitoring of graphical interface for X Window System. It allows monitoring the user sessions started locally via the graphical interface and viewing screenshots of the X Window System forwarded applications. NOTE: Monitoring of graphical interface for X Window System is a Beta version. Monitoring via Linux Clients Remote SSH Session Monitoring The Linux Client monitors the following actions: 1. User actions (input commands and responses from the terminal). 2. System calls. 3. Commands being executed in the running script. 4. [for X Window System] Screenshots of the applications started from the remote SSH terminal. Linux Clients start recording a new monitoring session each time the remote SSH terminal is opened. If a user opens a new application with X Window System forwarding, the Linux Client creates records that contain screenshots of the application window along with the whole user desktop. NOTE: The X Window System forwarded applications are monitored only if Access Control is disabled on the target X Window System server. There is no time limitation for a remote Linux Client session. The session status becomes Finished whenever the remote SSH terminal is closed or the Linux Client is disconnected from the Server. Whenever the Linux Client reconnects to the Server, the session status changes from Finished back to Live. Even if the license is unassigned from the Linux Client or the Linux Client process is killed, monitoring of started sessions continues until the remote SSH terminal is closed. Local Sessions Monitoring (for X Window System) Ekran System allows you to monitor the user session started locally via the graphical interface. The session includes recorded user activity (screenshots, application name, activity title, activity time). 196

197 The Linux Clients start monitoring after a user opens a new application window. The user activity is recorded every 10 seconds. A new session is started every time the computer is restarted. The maximum duration of one local session can be 24 hours. At 00:00 all live sessions are terminated. After their termination (their status changes from live to finished), new live sessions automatically start. Installing Linux Client About You can install the Linux Clients locally from the command line using the EkranSystemLinuxClient.tar.gz package, respectively: EkranSystemLinuxClientx64.tar.gz for the 64-bit system EkranSystemLinuxClientx86.tar.gz for the 32-bit system Downloading Linux Client Installation File To download the file for Linux Client installation, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Install Clients. 4. On the Computers without Clients page, click Download installation file. 5. On the Installation File Download page, select the Linux option in the drop-down list, and then click Linux x86 Client Installation (.tar.gz) or Linux x64 Client Installation (.tar.gz). 6. File downloading starts. The download settings depend upon the settings of your browser. Installing Linux Clients This type of installation allows you to install the Linux Clients locally from the command line using the downloaded EkranSystemLinuxClient.tar.gz package. On the operating systems with enabled Security-Enhanced Linux (for example, CentOS and RedHat), before installing the Client to the custom directory, you need to pre-configure the SELinux Policy first. On the Solaris operating system, before installing the Client, you need to update bash first. NOTE: For Linux, AIX, and Solaris distributions, GNU bash (1) or higher must be installed. 197

198 To install the Linux Client on the target computer with a Linux operating system from the command line: 1. Copy the installation package to any folder. Make sure you use the correct installation package (x64 or x86). 2. Run the command-line terminal. 3. Navigate to the folder with the installation package by entering the following command: $ cd path/to/folder 4. Unpack the installation package using the following command: $ tar xvfz <installation package name> 5. Navigate to the unpacked EkranClient folder using the following command: $ cd EkranClient The EkranClient folder contains the install.sh script used to install the Client. 6. Run the Linux Client installation script specifying the Server name or Server IP address and the port used for connection to the Server (9447 is recommended). Optionally, to enable the monitoring of graphical interface for X Window System, specify the X11 parameter. $ sudo./install.sh <server_name/ip> <server_port><-withx11>. 7. After the Client is installed, it starts monitoring the new terminal sessions. If you want to monitor the older terminal sessions, restart them. 198

199 8. The installed Linux Client appears in the list on the Client Management page in the Management Tool. Updating Linux Clients About Ekran System offers two update options for Linux Clients: - automatic update - update of selected Clients via the Management Tool The automatic Client update is performed when a Linux Client connects to the Server of a newer version. It is recommended to use the automatic Client update. If you want to control the update of target Client computers yourself, you can disable the automatic update on the required Clients and update them via the Management Tool. After the Linux Client is updated, you will still be able to access the monitored data received before its update. NOTE: Linux Clients of very old versions might not be able to update. In this case, you need to re-install the Clients. Linux Client Status after Server Update If the Update Client automatically option is enabled for the Linux Client, it is updated automatically when it connects to the Server of a newer version. If the Update Client automatically option is disabled for the Linux Client and it requires manual update, it is displayed with the icon in the grid on the Clients page. Such Clients store the monitoring data locally. They restart sending monitoring data to the Server after update. Updating Linux Clients Automatically To update a Linux Client automatically, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client that needs to be updated automatically and click Edit Client. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, select the Update Client automatically option. 5. Click Finish. 6. The Client will be updated automatically when it connects to the Server of a newer version. 199

200 Updating Linux Client Manually To update a selected Linux Client via the Management Tool, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Client that needs to be updated and click Edit Client. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, clear the Update Client automatically option. 5. Click Finish to save the changes. 6. Update the Server. 7. Log in to the Management Tool as a user that has the Client configuration management permission. 8. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 9. On the Clients page, select the Client that needs to be updated and click Edit Client. 10. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, click Update Client. 11. On its next connection to the Server, the Client will be updated to a newer version. Uninstalling Linux Clients To uninstall the Linux Client from the command line, do the following: 1. Run the command line terminal. 2. Navigate to the folder with the Linux Client by entering the command: $ cd /opt/.ekran 3. The.Ekran folder contains the uninstall.sh script used to uninstall the Client. 4. Run the uninstallation script by entering the following command: $ sudo./uninstall.sh and press Enter. 5. Enter the password of the superuser. 6. Linux Client is successfully uninstalled. Viewing Linux Clients The Linux Clients are displayed in the Management Tool in the Clients list along with the Windows Clients. If the users have an administrative Client installation and management permission, they will see all Clients. In other case, the user will see only those Clients for which they have at least one Client permission. The Client list contains the following information: 200

201 Client name Status Type IPv4 IPv6 Description The Domain column is empty for Linux Clients. Please note, if there are several network cards on the Client computer, only the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses used by Linux Client will be displayed in the Management Tool. You can filter Linux Clients in the following ways: To sort Clients by the type of operating system, click the Type column header. To find Linux Clients only, select Hide Windows Clients and Hide macos Clients and click Apply Filters. To find Clients by their host name or description, enter the name/description or a part of it in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. To hide offline/online/uninstalled/licensed Clients, select the corresponding option in the Filtering pane and click Apply Filters. Linux Client Description Client description is used as additional information about your Linux Clients, which makes it easier to find a specific Client. You can filter your Clients by their descriptions as well as by their names. Client description can be defined on the Editing Client page on the Properties tab. Only users with the Client configuration management permission can edit the Linux Client description. To edit the description for the Linux Client, enter it in the Description box and click Finish. Offline Clients Detection Parameter The offline Client detection parameter allows you to receive an notification about the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period. Such Clients are called lost. NOTE: The Offline Clients Detection parameter is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. If the Notify if the Client is offline for more than option is enabled, define the time period after which the Client will be detected as lost. By default, it is set to 1 day. If you want to receive an notification, define an address. You can define several addresses separating them with a semicolon (;). If you don t want to receive an notification, leave this field empty. To view the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period ( lost Clients), click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left and open the Offline clients tab. 201

202 Offline Cache Size Parameter The Client writes monitoring data to a local cache and automatically sends it to the Server. If there is no connection with the Server, the Client stores monitoring data in a local cache and automatically sends it to the Server as soon as the connection is restored. The Offline cache size (MB) parameter allows you to define the size of the Client cache so that you can control the Client disk spase usage. The default value is 100 MB. When the amount of monitoring data reaches the defined limit, the Client stops writing to the offline cache. Please note, it is recommended to set the offline cache size not less than 50 MB. Command Output Skipping Parameter Command output skipping allows you to reduce the amount of information received from the Linux Client by defining separate commands or commands with parameters which output will be skipped during the monitoring. To skip commands output, enter the commands in the Commands box separating them with a semicolon (;). Optionally, you can define the parameters for each command by entering them after the command and separating with spaces (e.g., <command parameter>;<command>;<command parameter1 parameter2>). User Filtering Parameters User filtering allows you to reduce the amount of information received from the Linux Client by defining computer users whose data will be skipped during the monitoring. User filtering affects both primary and secondary users. The User filtering can be in one of three states: Disabled: Activity of all users is monitored. Include: Activity of predefined users is monitored. Information on the activity of all other users is skipped. Exclude: Activity of all users except predefined ones is monitored. This mode allows you to skip information about the activity of particular users (for example, administrator). You can define user names for filtering entering them manually or by clicking Add Users and selecting users from the list. 202

203 When you enter user names manually, they must be separated with comma (,), semicolon (;), or paragraph. You can also use asterisk (*) as a name mask. Please note, user names are case sensitive. When you click Add Users, the Adding Users page opens. Only those users whose activities have already been monitored are listed. Select the user names to be added and click Add. Forced User Authentication on Linux Clients About If several users may use the same account (e.g., root ) to work with the terminal, it might be important to identify the person using the account. The identification can be performed by means of Forced User Authentication, which requires the user to enter additional credentials when they open the terminal. The user has to enter the credentials of the Ekran System user who has the Access Client computer permission. The secondary user login will then be displayed in the Client Sessions list in brackets next to the primary user name under which the terminal is launched. The forced user authentication works only if there is a connection between the Client computer and the Server computer. If the connection with the Server computer is lost (the Server is unavailable), the user will not be prompted to enter the secondary credentials. Enabling Forced User Authentication on Linux Client The Forced User Authentication parameter can be set only during Client editing. To enable Forced User Authentication on the Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Linux Client for which you want to enable Forced User Authentication, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Authentication options tab, select the Enable secondary user authentication on log-in option. 5. Click Finish. 6. The forced authentication mode is enabled immediately. When the user starts working with the terminal, they will be prompted to enter the secondary credentials. 203

204 Granting the User Permission to Work with the Terminal To grant an Ekran System user a permission to work with the terminal on the Linux Client computer with enabled forced user authentication, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative User management permission. 2. Edit an existing internal user who will log into the Client computer to the system or add a new one. 3. During the user adding/editing, on the Client Permissions tab, click Edit Permissions for the required Linux Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. In the opened Client Permissions window, select the Access Client computer option and then click Save. 5. Click Finish. Launching the Terminal The process of launching the terminal on the Linux Client computer with enabled forced user authentication is performed as follows: 1. The user launches the terminal. 2. The Client requests the user to enter their secondary credentials. 3. The user enters the credentials of the Ekran System user that has the Access to Client computer permission. 4. These credentials are sent to the Server and the Server returns the response on whether the access to the terminal is allowed. If the user has the required permission for the Client computer and their entered credentials are correct, the user is allowed to continue working with the terminal. In other case, the user will receive a corresponding message. 5. As soon as the user starts working with the terminal, the Client will start recording their activity. The user s name will be displayed in the Client Sessions list in the User name column in brackets: <Linux user> (<forced authentication user>). Restricting User Access by Time About The Restricted User Access by Time feature allows you to better protect the Client computers from access at undesired time. You can create a list of users whose access to the Client computers will be granted for a certain period of time. Such users will be able to log in to the Client computers only during this time period and will be forcibly logged out after it. NOTE: The Restricting User Access by Time feature is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. 204

205 Granting Access for a Certain Period of Time To add a user whose login into Linux Client computers must be allowed only during a certain period of time, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Restricted Users tab and then click Add User. 4. In the Add User window, in the User with Restricted Access Rights group, select the Linux User user type and define the user login. 5. In the Accessed Computer with Installed Client group, select one of the following options: To restrict access to any computer, select Any computer. To restrict access to computers of the specific Client Group, select Computers from Client Group and define the Linux Client Group. NOTE: Access will be restricted only for the computers with the installed Clients. 6. In the Restriction Type group, select Time interval and define the time period during which the access to the Linux Client computers will be allowed. 7. Click Save. 8. The user is added to the grid. During the next login, they will be able to start working with the Linux Client computers only during the defined time period. Deleting User from Restricted List To allow a user to log into Linux Client computers any time, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Restricted Users tab. 4. Click Delete user for the required user and then click OK in the confirmation message. 5. The user is deleted from the list and will be able to log in to Windows Client computers any time. 205

206 Two-Factor Authentication for Windows Clients About The Two-Factor Authentication feature allows you to better protect the critical endpoints in your network. When the Two-Factor Authentication feature is enabled, the Client will require the user to enter a time-based one-time password (TOTP) on their login to Windows. TOTPs are generated via special mobile application, i.e., Google Authenticator, Third-Party Accounts, and Authenticator. Google Authenticator can be downloaded via one of the following applications: Via Google Play for Android devices Via App Store for Apple devices Via Microsoft Store for Windows phones Via BlackBerry App World for BlackBerry devices Find the detailed instructions on installation and configuration of your authenticator application using the following links: For Android, ios, and Blackberry devices: For Android and ios devices: For Windows Phones: For users to be able to use TOTP, you have to provide them with a two-factor authentication key generated in the Management Tool. The Two-Factor Authentication option can be enabled for Windows computers during Client editing. In addition, if you have at least one serial key activated, the Two-Factor Authentication option can be enabled even for unlicensed Clients. Allowing User to Log In If only Two-Factor Authentication is enabled on the Windows Client computers, you have to generate TOTP keys for local and domain users. If Two-Factor Authentication is enabled along with the Forced User Authentication, you have to generate TOTP keys for secondary users. To allow the users to log into Client computers with enabled Two-Factor Authentication, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Two-Factor Authentication tab and then click Add User. 206

207 4. In the Add User window, select the user type and define the following information: For Active Directory user, define the domain name and user login. For Local computer user, define the computer name and user login. For Ekran user for secondary authentication, define the user login. 5. Click Generate to generate QR code and key. 6. Save the QR code or copy the key to your clipboard to send it to the corresponding user. Alternatively, make a note of it to provide it to the user later. The user will have to enter this key or scan the QR-code with their TOTP mobile application (i.e., Google Authenticator). For security reasons, after you navigate off this page, no one will be able to see the generated key again. 7. Click Save. Deleting User from the List To forbid the user to log into Client computers with enabled Two-Factor Authentication, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the User management permission. 2. Click the Access Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Access Management page, open the Two-Factor Authentication tab. 4. Click Delete user for the required user and then click OK in the confirmation message. 5. The user is deleted from the list and will be unable to log in to Client computers using TOTP. Enabling Two-Factor Authentication The Two-Factor Authentication parameter can be set only during Client editing. To enable Two-Factor Authentication on the Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Serial Key Management navigation link to the left and make sure you have at least one serial key activated. 3. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 4. On the Clients page, select the Windows Client and then click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 5. On the Editing Client page, on the Authentication options tab, select the Enable two-factor authentication option. 6. Click Finish. 7. The Two-Factor Authentication is enabled immediately. During the next login, the user will be prompted to enter a TOTP generated in their mobile application (i.e., Google Authenticator) to start working with the system. 207

208 Logging in Using Time-Based One-Time Password To log into the Client computer with enabled Two-Factor Authentication: 1. The user enters a two-factor authentication key in their TOTP mobile application (i.e., Google Authenticator). 2. The mobile application starts generating TOTPs. Each TOTP is valid for 5 minutes since the moment of its generation. 3. The user logs in to Windows in a common way (locally or remotely). 4. If Forced User Authentication is enabled, the user enters their secondary credentials. 5. The Client displays the TOTP window requesting a user to enter a TOTP generated in their mobile application. 6. The user specifies a valid TOTP and clicks OK. If the user has been authenticated via the Forced User Authentication, they have to specify a TOTP generated for the secondary user. NOTE: For the user to be authenticated using TOTP, the time on the Ekran Server and on the user s device must be synchronized. 7. The user name and TOTP are sent to the Server for validation. If the user is allowed to log in to Client computers with enabled Two-Factor Authentication and the TOTP is valid, they get logged in to the system and can start working with it. 8. As soon as the user logs into the system, the Client will start recording their activity. 208

209 User Blocking About Ekran System allows you to block users performing potentially harmful and forbidden actions on Windows Clients. You can add the user to the blocked user list on the selected Client computer or all Client computers in the system. A blocked user is forcibly logged out of the Client and is not allowed to log back in. You can block users while viewing their session, live or finished. You can also enable an option that allows blocking a user or killing the process when a certain alert is triggered. You need to have the Client installation and management permission to block users. Blocking User from Live Session To block a user while watching their live session, do the following: 1. Open the user session in the Session Viewer. 2. Click on the red lock in the Session Player. NOTE: The Lock is disabled for the users already on the Blocked User list and Ekran System users without the Client installation and management permission. 3. The Block User window opens. 209

210 4. Define the following settings: o Select On all computers if you want this user to be blocked on all computers with installed Clients. o Select On computer if you want the user to be blocked only on a current Client computer. 5. Define the forced log out time if necessary. 6. Enter the message to display to the user if necessary. 7. Enter the reason for blocking the user. 8. Click Block. 9. On the Client computer, the warning message is displayed and the desktop is blocked. 10. After the defined time interval, the user is forcibly logged out of the Client computer. If the user tries to log in to the Client computer, the system does not allow them to do so, and the following message is displayed: You have been blocked. Contact your system administrator. NOTE: If you have selected to block the user on all computers, they will be logged out on all computers where they are logged in at the time of blocking. Blocking User from Finished Session To block the user while watching their finished session, do the following: 1. Open the user session in the Session Viewer. 2. Click on the red lock in the Session Player. If the user is logged into the Client computer at that point, the blocking process is the same as for the Live sessions. NOTE: The Lock is disabled for the users already on the Blocked User list and Ekran System users without the Client installation and management permission. 3. The Block User window opens. 4. Define the following settings: o Select On all computers if you want this user to be blocked on all computers with installed Clients. 210

211 o Select On computer if you want the user to be blocked only on a current Client computer. 5. Click Block. 6. The user blocked with the default parameters. If the user tries to log in to the Client computer, the system does not allow them to do so, and the following message is displayed: You have been blocked. Contact your system administrator. NOTE: If you have selected to block the user on all computers, then they will be logged out on all computers where they are logged in at the time of blocking. Blocking User on Alert Triggering To configure an alert to block a user, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left and click Add Alert or Edit Alert. 3. On the Actions tab, select the Show warning message to user option. You can edit the message by entering the text in the box below. 4. In the Additional actions box, select the Block user on all computers option and click Finish. 5. The user will be blocked when the alert is triggered. Blocking User on Client with Secondary Authentication If the Client has secondary user authentication enabled, the system blocks the primarysecondary user combination. After such user logs in to Windows, the Client displays the secondary authentication window. When the blocked user enters their credentials and tries to log in, the system does not allow them to do so, and the following message is displayed: You have been blocked. Contact your system administrator. Blocked User List A blocked user is added to the blocked user list for the selected Client or all Clients in the system (depending on your choice while blocking the user). The list of blocked users is stored on the Server. If you edited the blocked user list, the Client receives it from the Server immediately. If the connection with the Server computer is lost (the Server is unavailable), the Client does not block users that are on the blocked user list. Once the connection is re-established, the Client receives the latest edited list of blocked users from the Server. 211

212 Viewing Blocked User List To view the blocked user list, go to Client Management, and then click Blocked User List. You need to have the Client installation and management permission to view the blocked user list. A list of blocked users is displayed, with the following information available for each record: Windows User: has one of the following formats: o <domain>\<user name> o <domain>\<primary user name>(<secondary user name>) (for Clients with secondary user authentication enabled) Blocked on: Displays a specific computer name or All computers. Blocked by: Displays a specific Ekran System user that has blocked the Windows user. Date: Displays the date when the user was blocked. Reason: Displays the reason for blocking the user. Removing User from Blocked User List You can remove users from the blocked user list, one by one or all at once. The user removed from the Blocked User list can log in to their computer with installed Client on again. To remove a user from the blocked user list, do the following: Click Remove in the corresponding blocked user record in the grid. Click Remove in the confirmation message. To remove all users from the blocked user list, do the following: Click Remove All in the blocked user grid. Click Remove in the confirmation message. 212

213 Client Group Management About Client Groups allow you to grant access to several Clients at the same time to your users without the necessity to grant them access to all the Clients (both Windows and Linux). By default, there is one Client Group in the system, which contains all installed Clients. You cannot remove Clients from this group. NOTE: One Client can belong to several groups. Adding Client Groups To add a new Client Group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Add Client Group. 4. On the Group Settings tab, define the following and then click Next: The name for the Client Group. Optionally, the Client Group description. The configuration that can be applied to the Windows Clients in the same way as defining Client configuration. NOTE: The maximum length of the Client Group name and description is 200 characters. 5. On the Client Management tab, add Clients to the group. Click Next. 6. On the Permissions tab, select users/user groups which will have access to the Client Group and define their permissions: To find a specific user/user group, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. To define user/user group permissions, click Define Permissions for the required users/user groups and select the check boxes near the corresponding permissions in the opened Client Permissions window. After you have defined all permissions, click Save. NOTE: Permissions inherited by the user from user groups to which they belong are displayed as disabled check boxes with a user group name near them. 7. Click Next. 8. On the Assigned Alerts tab, select the check boxes near the alerts that must be assigned to the group. 9. Click Finish. 213

214 10. The Client Group is created. Editing Client Groups To edit an existing Client Group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client Group for the required Client group. 4. Edit Client Group properties, permissions, and alerts on the corresponding tabs in the same way as when adding a new Client group. 5. Click Next or Finish to save the changes on each tab. Adding Clients to Groups Adding Clients to Groups during Client Group Editing 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client Group for the required Client group. 4. On the Editing Client Group page, on the Client Management tab, click Add Clients. 5. The drop-down list containing the Clients that have not been added to the Group opens. NOTE: Only the first 10 Clients are displayed in the list. To view all Clients, click the link in the bottom of the list. 6. Select the check boxes next to the Clients to be added to the Client Group. To find a specific Client, enter its name, description or a part of it in the Find Clients field above the Clients list. The list is filtered along with typing. 7. Select the Apply group settings to new Clients option if you want the added Clients to inherit Group settings. 8. Click Add. 9. The added Clients are displayed in the grid. 10. Click Finish. Adding Clients to Groups during Client Editing To add a Client to the group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 214

215 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client for the selected Client. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Client Groups tab, click Add to Group. 5. The drop-down list containing the groups to which the Client has not been added opens. NOTE: Only the first 10 groups are displayed in the list. To view all groups, click the Click to view all results link. 6. Select the option next to the group to which you want to add the Client. NOTE: To find a specific group, enter its name or a part of it in the Find Groups field. The list is filtered along with typing. 7. Click Add. 8. The group to which the Client was added is displayed in the grid. 9. Click Finish. Applying Group Settings to Client When the Client belongs to the target Client Group, the Client settings can be inherited from this Group. In this case, the Client settings are changed together with the Group settings. To edit the Windows Client configuration by changing the Client Group settings, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client Group for the required Group. To find a specific Client Group, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 4. Edit Client Group properties, permissions, and alerts on the corresponding tabs. 5. Click Finish. To edit the Windows Client configuration by applying group settings to a Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client configuration management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, select the Windows Client for which you want to edit the configuration, and click Edit Client. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. NOTE: If you do not have the Client configuration management permission for this Client, the configuration options editing will be disabled. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Client Groups tab, add the Client to the group from which you want the Client to inherit configuration. 5. Click the Apply link for the group. 215

216 6. The Client settings type changes to Inherited from <group name> and the Applied value is displayed for this group in the grid. 7. Click Finish. Removing Clients from Groups Removing Clients from Groups during Client Group Editing To remove a Client from the group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client Group for the required Client group. 4. On the Client Management tab, click the Remove link for the corresponding Client or click Remove all to remove all Clients from the group. 5. In the confirmation message, click OK. 6. The Client is removed from the Group. NOTE: The Client can be removed from all Groups except the All Clients group. 7. If settings of the removed Client were inherited from this group, they are changed to Custom. The Client settings remain the same but they become editable. Removing Clients from Groups during Client Editing To remove a Client from the group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client for the selected Client. 4. On the Editing Client page, on the Client Groups tab, click the Remove link for the corresponding Client group or click Remove from All to remove the Client from all groups. 5. In the confirmation message, click OK. 6. The Client is removed from the Group. NOTE: The Client can be removed from all Groups except the All Clients group. 7. If settings of the removed Client were inherited from the Client Group, their type is changed to Custom. In this case, the Client settings remain the same but they become editable. Deleting Client Groups If you delete a Client group, the Clients belonging to it will not be deleted, but the permissions of users defined for the deleted Client Group will change. The All Clients group cannot be deleted. 216

217 To delete a Client Group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client Group for the required Client group. 4. On the Group Properties tab, click Delete Client Group. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 6. The Client Group is deleted. 7. When the group is deleted, the configuration of all Clients that was inherited from this group changes to Custom. 217

218 Alerts About Alerts are instances that notify the investigator of a specific activity (potentially harmful/forbidden actions) on the target computers with installed Clients and allow the investigator to respond to such activity quickly without performing searches. The notifications can be received via or in the Tray Notifications application. Besides, monitored activity associated with alert events is marked as alert in the Session Viewer. Alert system can be used for two purposes: Immediate response: This allows the investigator to get immediate information about the forbidden action and respond to it quickly (almost at once). You can set an alert to automatically block a user or kill the process. Delayed response: This allows the investigator to get information on a batch of forbidden actions on multiple Clients, analyse them, and then respond. Viewing Alerts The alerts are displayed on the Alert Management page in the Management Tool. A list of alerts contains the following information: Name Description Risk Level: Indicates the risk level of an alert, which can be Normal, High or Critical. Assigned To: Indicates Clients/Client Groups the alert is assigned to. Alert State: Indicates if the alert is enabled. Notification Type: Indicates how the investigators are notified about alert events (by s or via Tray Notifications application). Recipient: The address of the investigator who will be notified about alert events. To view the latest 100 events for an alert in the Alert Viewer, click View alert events in the corresponding entry. To find a required alert, you can use a filtering option on the top of the page. Select the Hide Enabled/Disabled/Default Alerts options and then click Apply Filters to hide the alerts. On the Alert Management page, you can add new alerts, edit existing alerts (including deleting), and define Global Alert Settings. 218

219 Default Alerts The Ekran System contains a set of default alerts for the potentially harmful applications and websites visited on the Windows Client computers and for the important commands executed on the Linux Client computers. The default alerts are automatically added when the Ekran Server is installed or updated to a new version. These alerts are enabled by default but there are no Clients to which they are assigned. You can assign an alert to Clients by clicking Edit alert for the required alert and selecting the needed Clients on the Assigned Clients tab or while editing multiple alerts. Default alerts have the High risk level by default. You can do the following with default alerts: - Enable/disable them. - Change the alert risk level. - Define the notification options. - Enable showing a warning message, blocking the user or killing the process. - Delete them. To hide default alerts, select the Hide Default Alerts option and then click Apply Filters. Alerts Management Adding Alerts To add an alert, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left and click Add Alert. 3. On the Add Alert page, on the Alert Properties tab, define the following alert properties and then click Next: 219

220 Enter a unique name for an alert. Optionally, enter the alert description. Select the Enabled option to enable an alert. Select the alert risk level. It can be Critical, Normal, or High. 4. On the Alert Rules tab, define the rules to be applied and then click Next: Select the Parameter of the rule. Select the Comparison operator. Enter the Value to which Parameter will be compared. Click Add Rule to create one more rule. To delete a rule, clear its Value box or click Delete. 5. On the Assigned Clients tab, select the Clients/Client Groups to which the alert will be assigned and click Next. To find specific Clients/Client Groups, enter their names in the search box. 220

221 6. On the Actions tab, select how you would like to receive the alert notifications and additional actions to be performed when the alert is triggered: Select the Send s to option and then enter the address to which the notifications will be sent. You can enter several addresses separating them with semicolon. NOTE: To receive notifications correctly, make sure that Sending Settings contain correct parameters for sending. Select the Show warnings in Tray Notifications application option to activate the tray notifications. The alert notifications will then pop up from the tray. Select the Show warning message to user option if you want a warning message to be displayed to the user when the alert is triggered. You can use the default message or enter your own text in the box below. In the Additional actions box, select the Block user on all computers option if you want to automatically block the user performing forbidden actions, or select the Kill application option if you want to forcibly stop the detected application. 7. Click Finish to save the created alert. 8. The alert is added. 221

222 Rules About Alert rules allow you to determine what events on the investigated computer will be considered an alert. Each alert has to have at least one rule. Each rule consists of the Parameter, Comparison operator, and Value, to which the Parameter will be compared. The following parameters are available for rules: Parameter Description Example Parameters applied to all Clients Username The name of the user whose work is to be monitored. Set this parameter type for an alert to be activated whenever the specified user uses the Client computer. If forced user authentication is enabled and the secondary user login matches the user name alert parameter, the Client marks corresponding events as an alert. For example: The alert parameter is Login LIKE John. The user logs in to Windows as Guest and then enters John as the secondary login. The first record in the session of this user (Guest (John)) is marked as alert. John Parameters applied to Windows and macos Clients Application Title URL The name of the started application on the investigated computer. Select this parameter type for an alert to be triggered whenever the specified value is identified as the name of a launched application. The name that appears in the title of a window. Select this parameter type for an alert to be triggered whenever the specified value is identified in any title on the screen. URL entered in the browser address line or visited by the user. Select this parameter type for an alert to be skype.exe My document facebook.com 222

223 Parameter Description Example triggered whenever the specified value is identified as the URL address. NOTE: The URL monitoring option must be enabled for the Client. Parameters applied to Windows Clients Keystrokes Clipboard Copy Clipboard Paste The keystrokes entered by the user. Select this parameter type for an alert to be triggered whenever the specified value is entered. The clipboard value copied or cut by the user. Select this parameter type for an alert to be triggered whenever the specified value is copied or cut. Enter an asterisk (*) in the value field if you want to detect any copying or cutting action. The clipboard value pasted by the user. Select this parameter type for an alert to be triggered whenever the specified value is pasted. Enter an asterisk (*) in the value field if you want to detect any pasting action. download * C21H23 Parameters applied to Linux Clients Command The command entered in the Linux terminal. Set this parameter type for alerts to be activated whenever the specified command is entered. sudo Parameter The parameter of the entered Linux command. Set this parameter type for alerts to be activated when the user enters the command with specified parameters. ImportantDoc ument Parameters of Active Directory Groups Computer Belonging to Domain Group The name of the domain group. Select this parameter type for an alert to be triggered on the Client computers belonging to this group. NOTE: Alerts containing this parameter need to be assigned to the All Clients group to work properly. Accounting 223

224 Parameter Description Example User Belonging to Domain Group The name of the domain group. Select this parameter type for an alert to be activated whenever the users of specified domain group use the Client computers. Support Comparison operators For all parameters except for Active Directory groups, you can use the following comparison operators: Comparison operator Equals Description The defined value fully corresponds to the found result. Example Value Found Not found John John Johny Like The found result includes the defined value. John Johny, Johnatan Johan Not equals The found result does not match the defined value. John Oliver, Johny John Not like The found result does not include the defined value. John Oliver, Johan Johny, John Rules defined for Windows/mac OS and Linux parameters do not influence one another. Thus you can have rules for Windows/macOS and Linux Clients defined in one alert and the alert will work correctly. For example: Parameter Operator Value Rule 1 Command Equals su Rule 2 URL Like facebook.com Result The alert will be triggered by user entering the su command in the Linux terminal or visiting the facebook.com site from the computer with Windows or macos operating system. 224

225 When several rules are defined for the same parameter within one alert, using Like or Equals operators, the alert will be triggered if the conditions of at least one rule are met. For example: Parameter Operator Value Rule 1 Application Equals skype.exe Rule 2 Application Equals winword.exe Result The alert will be triggered by user launching either Skype or Microsoft Word. When the rules are defined for the different parameters within one alert, the alert will be triggered if the conditions of all the rules are met. For example: Parameter Operator Value Rule 1 Application Equals skype.exe Rule 2 Username Like Nancy Result The alert will be triggered by the user Nancy launching Skype application. When you have multiple rules defined for one parameter and one rule defined for the other parameter, using Like or Equals operators, the alert will be triggered if conditions of any rule from the first group and the conditions of the rule defined for a different parameter are met. For example: Parameter Operator Value Rule 1 Application Equals skype.exe Rule 2 Application Equals winword.exe Rule 3 Username Equals Nancy Result The alert will by triggered by user Nancy launching Skype or Microsoft Word. When you have multiple rules defined for one parameter, using Not equals/not like operators, the alert will be triggered if the found result does not match to/include all of the defined values. For example: Parameter Operator Value Rule 1 Application Not equals skype.exe Rule 2 Application Not equals winword.exe Result The alert will be triggered by the user launching any application except for Skype and Microsoft Word. 225

226 Rule Examples 1. To set up the alert notification about any user opening the facebook.com site on the investigated computer, select the URL parameter and, in the Value field, enter facebook.com. NOTE: The URL monitoring option must be enabled for the Client. 2. To set up the alert notification about any user opening opening any other site except Facebook on the investigated computer, select the Not like operator: 3. To set up the alert notification about a specific user (e.g., Stefan) opening Facebook on the investigated computer, define the following parameters: 226

227 If you enter more than one name, the alert notification will then appear if any of them (Stefan or Rick) opens Facebook. If you use the Not like operator for the entered names, the alert notification will appear if any user except for Stefan or Rick opens Facebook. 227

228 4. To set up the alert notification about any user launching skype.exe application on the investigated computer, define the following parameters: If you use the Not equals operator, the alert notification will appear if any application except for Skype is opened. 228

229 5. To set up the alert notification about a specific user (e.g., Stefan) opening facebook.com in Chrome, define the following parameters: 6. To set up the alert notification about USB-based storages plugging in, define the following parameters: 7. To set up the alert notification about entering any command with sudo or a command su, define the following parameters: 229

230 8. To set up the alert notification about accessing the Client computers by users belonging to the target domain group, define the following parameters: 9. To set up alert notification about opening Facebook on the investigated computer, which belongs to the domain group, define the following parameters: NOTE: Such alerts need to be assigned to the All Clients group to work properly. 10. To set up the alert notification about launching the skype.exe application by the users belonging to the target domain group on the Client computers belonging to the target domain group, define the following parameters: 230

231 Enabling/Disabling Alerts If you do not need to receive notifications on a specific alert which you do not want to delete, you can disable it in the Management Tool by clearing the Enabled option on the Alert Properties tab of the Edit alert page. This option can be enabled again later, by selecting the Enabled option on the same page. To enable/disable multiple alerts, do one of the following: On the Alert Management page, select alerts and click Enable/Disable. On the Alert Management page, click Manage Multiple Alerts. On the opened Manage Multiple Alerts page, click Enable/Disable next to alerts or Enable All/Disable All in the last column header. Editing Alerts Editing Single Alert To edit a single alert, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. Click Edit alert for the required alert. 4. Edit alert properties and rules on the corresponding tabs in the same way as when adding a new alert. NOTE: Click Next or Finish to save the changes on each tab. 5. The alert is edited. Editing Multiple Alerts To edit multiple alerts, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with an administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. Click Manage Multiple Alerts. 4. On the Alert Selection page, select the alerts to be edited, enable/disable the required alerts, and then click Next. 5. On the Assigned Clients tab, select the Clients/Client Groups to which the alerts will be assigned and click Next. To find specific Clients/Client Groups, enter their names in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 6. On the Actions tab, select how you would like to receive the alert notifications and additional actions to be performed when the alert is triggered. Select Show warning message to user option if you want a warning message to be displayed to the user. You can 231

232 edit the message by entering your text in the box below. Optionally, choose Additional actions from the list. Click Finish. 7. The alerts settings are edited. Assigning Alerts to Clients Assigning Alerts to Clients during Alert Editing To assign an alert to a specific Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with an administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Alert Management page, click Edit alert for the required alert. 4. On the Assigned Clients tab, select the Clients or Client Groups to which the alerts will be assigned and click Next. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 5. Click Finish to save the changes. 6. The alert is assigned to the selected Client. Assigning Alerts to Clients during Editing Multiple Alerts To assign an alert to a specific Client, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with an administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Alert Management page, click Manage Multiple Alerts. 4. On the Alert Selection tab, select the alerts to be assigned to the Client. 5. On the Assigned Clients tab, select the Client to which the selected alerts will be assigned and click Next. To find a specific Client, enter its name in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 6. Click Finish to save the changes. 7. The alerts are assigned to the Client. Assigning Alerts to Clients during Client/Client Group Editing To assign an alert to a specific Client or Client Group, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with an administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 232

233 3. On the Clients page, click Edit Client for the required Client or Edit Client Group for the required Client Group. 4. On the Editing Client/Editing Client Group page, on the Assigned Alerts tab, select the alerts to be assigned to the Client/Client Group and click Finish. 5. The alerts are assigned to the Client/Client Group. Exporting and Importing Alerts Exporting Alerts To export an alert, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Alert Management page, click Export Alerts. 4. Select the alerts to be exported and click Export. 5. The Alerts.xml file containing the selected alerts and their parameters is downloaded to your computer. Importing Alerts To import an alert, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Alert Management page, click Import Alerts. 4. On the Import Alerts page, click Choose File. 5. In the opened window, select the required.xml file containing the alerts to be imported and click Open. 6. The imported alerts are added. These alerts are enabled by default but there are no Clients to which they are assigned. The name, description, risk level, and rules of the imported alerts are defined according to the.xml file. NOTE: If Ekran Server contains an alert that has the same ID as one of the imported alerts, it will be updated. 7. Click Define Imported Alerts Settings to assign the imported alerts to Clients/Client Groups and to define the notification options. Deleting Alerts To delete an alert, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 233

234 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Alert Management page, click Edit Alert for the required alert. 4. On the Alert Properties tab, click Delete Alert. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 6. The alert is deleted. All alert events that were detected by this alert are not marked as alert anymore. To delete multiple alerts, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Alert Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Alert Management page, select the required alerts and then click Delete. 4. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 5. The alerts are deleted. All alert events that were detected by these alerts are not marked as alert anymore. Defining Global Alert Settings Global Alert Settings allow you to define notification settings for all alerts. Their editing is available to users with the administrative Client installation and management permission. These settings are applied to all alerts. To define Global Alert Settings, click Global Alert Settings on the Alert Management page. Frequency Settings The Frequency settings group allows you to define how frequently the alert notifications will appear in the Tray Notifications application and be sent via . Minimal interval between notifications sent for the same alert event. This option defines how frequently the notifications about the same alert event will appear. For example, if this parameter is set to 10 minutes and a user has started Skype and works in it, the investigator will receive one notification every 10 minutes instead of receiving 10 notifications every minute or even more. Define how often the notification will be sent: - Send notifications on every alert event option allows you to notify the investigator on every alert event. - Send batch notification every (min) option allows you to notify the investigator about all alert events that occurred during defined time interval. Time counting starts when the Server starts if this option is selected. Notifications are then sent with the defined frequency. 234

235 Receiving Information on Alert Events You can receive information on alert events in the following ways: In the Session Viewer, the alert events are marked with a special icon. The name of an alert is displayed in the Alert/USB Rule column. Also the alert events are highlighted in different colours depending on the detected alert risk level: o The alerts with the Critical risk level are highlighted in red colour. o The alerts with the High risk level are highlighted in yellow colour. o The alerts with the Normal risk level are highlighted in blue colour. In the Session List, the sessions that contain alert events have a special icon, which you can click to view the alert events in the Alert Viewer. The colour of the alert icon depends on the highest alert risk level detected in the session. On the Recent Alerts dashboard containing information on alerts triggered within a specific time period and a list of notifications for each alert. The colour of the alert bars depends on the alert risk level and the dashboard settings. If notifications are enabled in the Alert Parameters, the information on alert events will be sent to defined recipients. To receive notifications via , define Sending Settings. Each contains metadata of the alert event (user name, Client name, time, application name, alert risk level, and activity title) and the link for viewing this alert in the Session Viewer. You can customize the subjects to be used in notifications sent by Ekran System. To define the subjects of the notifications, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the Customization tab. If the tray notifications are enabled in the Alert Parameters, the information on alert events will be sent via Tray Notifications component. To receive alert notifications in the Tray Notifications, do the following: 1. Install the Tray Notifications on the computer where alert notifications are to be received. 2. Log in to the Tray Notifications as a user of the Ekran System. 3. Start receiving alert notifications in the Windows Tray. 4. Use the Tray Notifications journal to view the history of received tray notifications and get more information on the alert event by opening the session in the Session Viewer. See the Tray Notifications application help file for more information. Advanced Reports About The user activity can be analysed with the help of reports generated via the Management Tool. These reports allow you to receive the information on the activity of multiple Clients, alert events, detected URLs, and executed Linux commands, and get statistics on time spent by the user in each application or on each web-page. 235

236 You can schedule the reports to be generated and sent via at the specified time or manually generate the reports, which can be saved or printed, via Report Generator. The reports can be generated in any of the following formats: PDF (*.pdf), Web Page (*.html), Single File Web Page (*.mht), Rich Text Format (*.rtf), Plain Text (*.txt), Excel Workbook (*.xlsx), Excel Workbook (*.xls), XPS Document (*.xps), CSV Document (*.csv), and XML (*.xml). NOTE: To view the Japanese characters in the exported PDF reports, install the Arial Unicode MS font on the Ekran Server and Management Tool computers and then reboot them. New generated reports will contain the properly displayed Japanese characters. Report Types The following types of reports are available in the Management Tool: Report type Grid Reports Contains the information about Consists of the following columns Alert Grid Report All alert events on all selected Clients for the defined users and defined time interval. Activity time Alert name Alert risk Details Clipboard Grid Report (for Windows Clients) All Clipboard text data of all selected Clients for the defined users and defined time interval. Activity time Activity title Application name Clipboard Operation Clipboard Text Detailed Activity Report Information on all activities performed by a user on any Client computer in the network during the defined time interval. Activity time Activity title Application name Session URL Text data Kernel-level USB Grid Report (for Windows Clients) All USB-device-related events detected by the kernel-level USB monitoring rules. Time Rule Name Action (Blocked/Detected) Risk Level Device Class Device Details 236

237 Report type Contains the information about Consists of the following columns Keystroke Grid Report (for Windows Clients) All keystrokes of all selected Clients for the defined users and defined time interval. Activity time Activity title Application name Keystrokes (Smart) Keystrokes (Raw) Linux Grid Report (for Linux Clients) All commands executed on Linux Clients. NOTE: Linux reports include only exec* and sudo commands. Time Command Parameters Function Session Grid Report All sessions for all selected Clients for the defined users and defined time interval. User name Total time (hrs) Active time Session Start Last Activity Remote IP Session URL Comment Sessions out of Work Hours Grid Report Information on time user spent out of work hours for all selected Clients for the defined users and defined time interval. The idle time is excluded. User name Total time spent Active out of work hours Session start time Last activity time Remote IP Session URL USB Storage Grid Report (for Windows Clients) All detected USB devices on all selected Clients for the defined users and defined time interval. Time (date and time of the USB Storage event) Details (Description of the USB devices plugged into the Client computers) User Daily Activity Grid Report All activities without idle time for all selected Clients for the defined users and defined time interval. User name Total time spent (hrs) First activity time Last activity time Remote IP Session URL 237

238 Report type Contains the information about Consists of the following columns User Statistics Report The statistic information on the user s total working time, on all user s sessions, and on all Client computers used by the user. User name Total time spent (hrs) Session Count Computers Remote IPs Summary Reports Activity Summary Report (for Windows and macos Clients) URL Summary Report (for Windows and macos Clients) Chart Reports Time spent by the user in each application (by application name) for the defined users and defined time interval. Idle time. Time spent by the user on each site (by domain name) for the defined users and defined time interval. Application title Time spent in the application (%) Time spent (hrs) URL only the main part of the URL (e.g., example.com) will be added to the report. Time spent (hrs) Activity Chart Report (for Windows and macos Clients) The same information as in the Activity Summary Report, but in the form of a bar chart. Application title Total time spent (minutes) Activity Pie Chart Report (for Windows and macos Clients) The same information as in the Activity Summary Report, but in the form of a pie chart. Application title Time spent in the application (%) URL Chart Report (for Windows and macos Clients) The same information as in the URL Summary Report, but in the form of a bar chart. URL only the main part of the URL (e.g., example.com) will be added to the report. Total time spent (minutes) URL Pie Chart Report (for Windows and macos Clients) The same information as in the URL Summary Report, but in the form of a pie chart. URL only the main part of the URL (e.g., example.com) will be added to the report. Time spent on the website (%). 238

239 Report Customization The custom reports settings allow you to use the custom header and footer text in the reports. Also, you can enable using a custom logo instead of the Ekran System logo on the first page of the report. To customize reports, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the Customization tab. To change the custom header and footer of the report, define the text in the Header text and Footer text fields in the Custom Reports Settings group. To use a custom logo instead of the default logo in the reports, select the Use a custom logo instead of the Ekran System logo option in the Custom Reports Settings group, click Choose File, and select the logo. The uploaded file must be in the.bmp,.jpg or.png format and not more than 300x85. Please note that the defined settings are applied to all reports for all users. Scheduled Reports About The Management Tool allows creating reports via Report Scheduler and sending them the defined addresses with the defined time interval. The reports creation is available to users with the administrative Client installation and management permission. The report creation and sending options are defined in rules, which include the following parameters: rule name and description, report type and format, state (enabled or disabled), generation frequency (daily, weekly, or monthly), Clients/Client groups, and Users on Clients to which the rule must be applied. The created rules are displayed on the Scheduled Reports page in the grid with the following columns: Name Description Assigned To Monitored Users State Frequency Recipients Adding Report Rules To add a rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Scheduled Reports navigation link to the left and click Add rule. 239

240 3. On the Add rule page, on the Rule Properties tab, enter a unique name for the created rule and then optionally enter its description and select the Enable scheduled report generation option. Click Next. 4. On the Report Options tab, do the following and then click Next: Select one or several Report Types. Define the Report Parameters: o In the Report format field, select the format for the report. o In the Generate report field, select the frequency of report generation (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly). o In the Start report generation at field, define the time at which the report generation must be started. NOTE: Depending upon the Server load, the report generation can start a few minutes later than the set time. You can select the value from the drop-down list and edit it manually if you need to set your own number of minutes. If the Weekly parameter is selected in the Generate report field, select the day of the week on which the report will be generated in the Day of week drop-down list. If the Monthly parameter is selected in the Generate report field, select the day of the month on which the report will be generated in the Day of month dropdown list. NOTE: If the Monthly parameter is selected and you want the report to be generated on the 31 st day of the month, it will be generated only in those months where there are 31 days. In the Work Hours group, define the work days and work hours for each selected day. Time users spent out of defined work hours will be added to the report. Enter the addresses to which the report will be sent in the s field. NOTE: Define the Sending Settings to receive the scheduled reports via On the Assigned Clients tab, select the Windows Clients/Client Groups to which the rule will be applied and click Next. To find specific Windows Clients/Client Groups, enter their names in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 6. On the Monitored Users tab, define the users whose activity will be included in the report: Select the Any user option if you do not need to specify the user whose activity will be added. In other case, select the Selected users option, click Add Users, and then do the following: 1) Select the Display only users detected on selected Clients option above the grid in order to view only the list of users on Clients selected in the Clients section. 2) Select the required users and then click Add selected. NOTE: Only those users whose activities have already been monitored are listed. 7. Click Finish. 8. The rule is added. NOTE: The scheduled report rule can also be created by clicking Create Scheduled Report Rule in the Report Generator drop-down menu. 240

241 Editing Report Rules To edit a rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Scheduled Reports navigation link to the left. 3. Click Edit Rule for the required rule. 4. Edit rule properties, report options, and define assigned Windows Clients and monitored users on the corresponding tabs in the same way as when adding a new rule. NOTE: Click Next or Finish to save the changes on each tab. 5. The rule is edited. Deleting Report Rules To delete a rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Scheduled Reports navigation link to the left. 3. Click Edit Rule for the required rule. 4. On the Rule Properties tab, click Delete Rule. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 6. The rule is deleted. Generating Reports from the Scheduled Report Rule Once the scheduled report rule is created, you can generate a report from the Rule Properties tab any time. To generate a report from the Scheduled Report Rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Scheduled Reports navigation link to the left. 3. Click Edit Rule for the required rule. 4. On the Rule Properties tab, click Generate Report. 5. The generation of the report starts. 6. The report can be viewed on the Scheduled Reports Generation Log page as soon as it is generated. If the s field contains one or more addresses defined in the rule, the report will be sent to those addresses. NOTE: If the generated report is not displayed on the Scheduled Reports Generation Log page, it is still being generated. Reload the page by pressing the F5 key until the report is displayed. 241

242 Frequency and Time Interval for Report Creation The time interval of the data that is added to the report depends upon the report generation frequency. If the report is generated on a daily basis, it will include the data that was monitored starting from the specified time of the previous day up till the specified time of the current day. For example: If the Daily parameter is set and the report is to be generated on June, 13, at 17:00, the time interval of the data for this report will start on June, 12, at 17:00 and end on June, 13, at 17:00. If the report is generated on a weekly basis, it will include the data that was monitored starting from the specified time and day of the previous week up till the specified time and day of the current week. For example: If the Weekly parameter is set and the report is to be generated on Monday at 18:00, the time interval of the data for this report will start on Monday of the previous week at 18:00 and end on Monday of the current week at 18:00. If the report is generated on a monthly basis, it will include the data that was monitored starting from the specified time and day of the previous month up till the specified time and day of the current month. For example: If the Monthly parameter is set and the report is to be generated on January, 20, at 19:00, the time interval of the data for this report will start on December, 20, at 19:00 and end on January, 20, at 19:00. NOTE: If the Monthly parameter is selected and you want the report to be generated on the 31 st day of the month, it will not be generated in those months where there are 30 days or less. If the monthly report is set to be generated on the 31 st day of month, but there were less than 31 days in the previous month, the time interval of the data for this report will start on the last day of the previous month and end on the 31 st day of the current month. For example: If the report is generated on March, 31, the time interval of the data for this report will start February, 28, or February, 29, and end on March, 31. If the report is generated from the scheduled report rule, the time interval of the data for the report will depend upon the current date and time. For example: 242

243 If the Daily parameter is set in the rule and the Start report generation parameter is set to 15:00, and you want to generate the report at 14:00, the time interval of the data for the report will start from 14:00 of the previous day and end at 14:00 of the current day. If the Weekly parameter is set in the rule and the Day of week parameter is set to Wednesday, and you want to generate the report on Friday at 12:00, the time interval of the data for the report will start from Friday of the previous week at 12:00 and end on the current day at 12:00. If the Monthly parameter is set in the rule and the Day of month parameter is set to the 15 th day of month, and you want to generate the report on May, 10, at 10:00, the time interval of the data for the report will start from April, 10, at 10:00 and end on the current day at 10:00. NOTE: If there are too many activities in the defined time interval, the report may become too large. The generated report file cannot exceed the size of allowed SMTP server attachments. Viewing Logs For each rule, the user can see the log which contains the information on time when the report was generated, report name (file name) and type, report generation result (status), number of results in the report, and the s to which the report was sent. NOTE: Only the last 100 records are stored. To view the logs, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the Scheduled Reports navigation link to the left. 3. Click View Log for the required rule. 4. On the Scheduled Reports Generation Log page, the logs are displayed in the grid with the following columns: Generated (Time when the report was generated) File Name (Report name) Report Type Status (Finished, In Progress, or an error reason in case the error occurred during report generation) Results Count (Number of results in the report) Sent To 5. Click the Download link to download the report to your computer. 6. Click the Delete link to delete the report from the log and from the Server. 243

244 Report Generator About The reports can be generated on the Report Generator page by the user with the Viewing monitoring results permission and can be previewed before printing. You can view the description and image of the selected report on the right. To view the PDF sample of the selected report, click Download PDF sample. The main difference between Report Scheduler and Report Generator is that Report Generator allows you to create reports for the time interval of any length. Though it may take you much time to generate a report for a long time interval and for a big number of Windows Clients. NOTE: You can generate only one type of report at a time via Report Generator. Report Parameters The following parameters are defined in the Management Tool when creating a report: 1. Report type This option allows you to select the type of the report. When the type of the report is selected, its description and image are displayed on the right. 2. Date filters This option allows you to define the time interval for which the report will be generated. 3. [For Sessions out of Work Hours Grid Report] Work hours This option allows you to define the work days and work hours for each selected day. Time users spent out of defined work hours will be added to the report. 4. Clients This option allows you to select the Clients/Client groups, whose monitored data will be added to the report. NOTE: Only Clients for which the user has the Viewing monitoring results are displayed. 5. Users This option allows you to select the users of Client computers whose activity will be included in the report. Generating Report To generate a report, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Viewing monitoring results permission. 2. Click the Report Generator navigation link to the left. 3. Define the report parameters: Select the type of the report. 244

245 In the Date Filters group, define the time interval for which the report is generated. The data of the monitored Clients is added for the set period. To set the time period, select one of the following: o Define the number of latest hours, days, weeks, or months. o Define the start date and the end date of the time period. [For Sessions out of Work Hours Grid Report] In the Work Hours group, define the work days and work hours for each selected day. Time users spent out of defined work hours will be added to the report. In the Clients group, click Add and in the opened Add drop-down list select the check boxes next to the corresponding Clients. Once the Clients are selected, click Add. In the Client Groups group, click Add and in the opened Add drop-down list select the check boxes next to the corresponding Client groups. Once the Client Groups are selected, click Add. Define the users whose activity will be included in the report: o By default, the Any value is selected and activities of all users are added to the report. o To specify the user, click Any and then click Add. In the opened Add dropdown list, select the required users. Once the Users are selected, click Add. NOTE: Only those users whose activities have already been monitored are listed. 4. Click Generate Report. 5. On the opened Report Preview page, click the corresponding icons located on the toolbar above the report to perform the following actions: Print the report Print the current page Export and save the report to the disk Export a report to *.xml format and save it to the disk You can also navigate between the pages of the report by clicking the blue arrows and choose the format of the report by clicking the black arrow that opens a drop-down list with all supported formats. Creating a Scheduled Report Rule from the Report Generator Page Once the parameters for the report are defined, you can create a scheduled report rule basing on the defined parameters. To create a rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Viewing monitoring results permission. 2. Click the Report Generator navigation link to the left. 3. Define the report parameters. 4. In the Report Generator drop-down menu, click Create Scheduled Report Rule. 5. The Editing Rule page opens. 245

246 6. On the Rule Properties tab, enter a unique name for the created rule and then optionally enter its description. The default name of the rule is GeneratorRule<number of rule>. 7. Click Next. 8. On the Report Options tab, enter the corresponding values in the Report Parameters fields and the s field the same as when adding a new report rule. The other parameters like Report Type, Clients, and Users were defined in Report Generator, but you can edit them if you want. 9. Click Finish. 246

247 USB Monitoring & Blocking About There are two types of monitoring of USB devices available: USB-based storage monitoring: allows you to view information on the plugged-in devices detected by Windows as mass storage. This monitoring is performed automatically and does not require enabling any additional settings for a Client. The information on detected USB devices is displayed in the Session Viewer. Kernel-level USB monitoring: provides you with the means for an in-depth analysis of plugged-in devices. By adding kernel-level USB rules, you can perform the following actions: o Monitoring allows you to view information on the detected devices in the Session Viewer. o Sending notifications allows you to receive notifications (by or in the Tray Notifications app) when a device is connected to the Client computer. o Blocking allows you to block the USB device from using. In this case, the user may be informed that the device on their computer is blocked. It is also possible to create a list of devices that must not be monitored or blocked. WARNING! It is recommended to add all the allowed USB devices to exceptions in order not to block them from using accidentally. Monitored Devices For USB-based storage monitoring: the following mass storage devices are automatically monitored and alerted external magnetic hard drives, external optical drives (including CD and DVD reader and writer drives), portable flash memory devices, solid-state drives, adapters between standard flash memory cards and USB connections, digital cameras, digital audio and portable media players, card readers, PDAs, and mobile phones. For kernel-level USB monitoring: the following classes of devices are monitored, blocked, and alerted: Mass storage devices external magnetic hard drives, external optical drives (including CD and DVD reader and writer drives), portable flash memory devices, solid-state drives, adapters between standard flash memory cards and USB connections, digital cameras, digital audio and portable media players, card readers, PDAs, and mobile phones. Windows portable devices audio players, phones, and other devices that use nonstandard identifier. Wireless connection devices Bluetooth adapter, Microsoft RNDIS. 247

248 Modems and Network adapters network interface controllers. Audio devices speakers, microphones, sound cards, MIDIs, etc. Video devices web cameras. Human interface devices keyboards, computer mouse devices, joysticks. Printer devices laser printers, inkjet printers, CNC computers. Composite devices devices that consist of one or a few more devices (e.g. keyboards with USB ports). Vendor-specific devices devices which require vendor-specific drivers and whose class is defined by the vendor. WARNING! Selecting this type of device might result in blocking any USB device. Each class has its own name (e.g., 00, 01, 02, etc.), which can be viewed in the device properties. The name of class allows you to define to what class the detected device belongs. 248

249 For more information, check these links: To view the name of the USB device class, do the following: 1. Plug the device into your computer. 2. Right-click Computer and select Manage. 3. The Computer Management window opens. 4. Expand the Device Manager node. 5. Expand the node with the name of the computer in the central pane. 6. Select the Universal Serial Bus controllers node in the list and expand it. 7. Find the device, the class of which you want to view, right-click it and select Properties. 8. In the opened window, select the Details tab, then select Compatible Ids in the Property drop-down list, and view the necessary information in the Value field. 9. Click OK or Cancel to close the window. Kernel-Level USB Monitoring Rules About In order to monitor and block the devices which are plugged into the computer, the user needs to create rules in the Management Tool. The rules can be created and assigned to the Clients by the user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. The created USB Monitoring rules are displayed on the USB Monitoring Management page in the Management Tool in a grid with the following columns: Name Description Risk State Action Assigned to (Clients group) 249

250 Adding USB Monitoring Rules To add a new rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the USB Monitoring Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the USB Monitoring Management page, click Add Rule. 4. On the Add USB Rule page, on the USB Rule Properties tab, define the following properties and then click Next: Enter a unique name for the rule. Optionally enter the rule description. Select the Enable USB rule option to enable the rule. Select the risk level. 5. On the Rule Conditions tab, do the following: Add the classes of devices to be monitored to the Monitored Devices list. Define the exceptions for the devices to be skipped while monitoring. 6. On the Additional Actions tab, define what happens when a device from the list of monitored devices is used on target computer by selecting the following options: Block USB device allows you to prevent the user from using the USB device from the Monitored Devices list on the target computer. This option affects all the users, regardless of the user filtering settings. Notify the user on target computer about device blocking allows you to define the custom text to be displayed in a balloon notification on the Client computer (maximum 250 characters). Send notification to allows you to receive an alert notification on USB device detection via . NOTE: To receive notifications correctly, make sure that Sending Settings contain correct parameters for sending. 250

251 Display tray notification allows you to receive an alert notification on USB device detection via the Tray Notification app. If you do not select any of the actions, the detected USB devices will be monitored and displayed in the Session Viewer only. 7. On the Assigned Clients tab, select the Clients/Client Groups, to which the rule will be applied, and click Next. To find specific Clients/Client Groups, enter their names in the Contains box and click Apply Filters. 8. Click Finish. 9. The rule is added. Editing USB Monitoring Rules To edit a rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the USB Monitoring Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the USB Monitoring Management page, click Edit Rule for the required rule. 4. Edit rule properties on the corresponding tabs in the same way as when adding a new rule and click Finish. 251

252 5. The rule is edited. Deleting USB Monitoring Rules To delete a rule, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Client installation and management permission. 2. Click the USB Monitoring Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the USB Monitoring Management page, click Edit Rule for the required rule. 4. On the USB Rule Properties tab, click Delete Rule. 5. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 6. The rule is deleted. In case some plugged-in devices were blocked in accordance with the rule, the user will have to remove the devices and plug them back in. Defining Exceptions for USB Rules The list of exceptions for USB devices includes the devices are not monitored or blocked. Unlike the Monitored Devices list that contains the classes of devices, the exceptions include the separate devices added individually. The exceptions can be added on the Rule Conditions tab when adding or editing the rule. In case you want to block vendor-specific devices, make sure you have added all allowed user devices to the list of exceptions. To add an exception, do the following: 1. On the Rule Conditions tab, click Add. 2. On the Add Exception page, select one of the following radio buttons: Quick selection allows you to enter your Device Hardware ID. Custom selection allows you to enter the Vendor ID (VID), Product ID (PID), Revision, and Serial in the corresponding fields. NOTE: The Vendor ID (VID) and the Product ID (PID) are required fields, Revision and Serial are optional fields. 3. Optionally, enter a description in the Description field. 252

253 4. Click Add. 5. The specified device is added to the list of exceptions. 6. Click Finish to save the USB monitoring rule. 7. The rule is edited. Viewing Device Hardware ID To view the Device hardware ID, do the following: 1. Plug the device into your computer. 2. Right-click Computer and select Manage. 3. The Computer Management window opens. 4. Expand the Device Manager node. 5. Expand the node with the name of the computer in the central pane. 6. Select the Universal Serial Bus Controllers node in the list and expand it. 7. Find the device, the information of which you want to view, right-click it and select Properties. 8. In the opened window, select the Details tab, then select Hardware Ids in the Property drop-down list, and view the necessary information in the Value field. 9. Click OK or Cancel to close the window. 253

254 Configuration Settings Available for Default Tenant Admin (Technician)/Users in Single Tenant Mode Defining Sending Settings sending settings allow you to define the options of sending notifications for all alerts, USB monitoring, and reports via . Their editing is available to users with the administrative Client installation and management permission. To define sending settings, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the sending settings tab. The settings include: 1. Connection Settings Server: This option allows you to define an existing SMTP mail server. NOTE: The delivery of notifications via mail servers with only NTLM authentication, such as Microsoft Exchange Server, is not supported. From: This option allows you to define an existing account from which the notifications will be sent. Port: This option allows you to define the server port number via which the s will be sent. Encrypted connection type: This option allows you to define the type of encrypted connection via which the notifications will be sent. You can choose between: - None - SSL - TLS 2. Connection Credentials This option allows you to define the login details (User and Password) for the server. NOTE: For the notifications to be sent correctly, you have to define the credentials of the account specified in the From field under the Connection Settings. If the mail server does not require entering any credentials, you can select the No authentications option. 3. Administrator This option allows you to define the administrator s address to which the access requests of restricted users will be sent. You can define several addresses separating them with semicolon (;). 4. Connection Test This option allows you to send a test to a specified address to check if all connection settings are correctly defined. 254

255 Defining System Settings System settings allow you to define the Ekran System mode and the player link settings. To define the system settings, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the System Settings tab. The settings include: 1. Ekran System Mode This option allows you to enable the Multi-tenant mode for Ekran System. In this mode, all tenant users have access to their tenant Clients, but they have no access to other tenants Clients, configurations, alerts, reports, etc. 2. Player Link Settings. This option allows you to define the Management Tool domain name that will be used in the link to the Session Viewer in alert notifications, in Tray Notifications application journal, and s. The domain name must be entered in the following format: Tool computer name or IP>/EkranSystem. Defining Customization Settings Customization settings allow you to customize the Ekran Client notification logo, reports and subjects. To define the customization settings, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the Customization tab. The settings include: 1. Custom Logo Settings This option allows you to enable using custom graphic file instead of the default logo on the Client computer during secondary authentication, user blocking, etc. To use a custom logo instead of the default logo, select the Use a custom logo instead of the Ekran System logo option in the Custom Logo Settings, click Choose File, and select the logo. Please note that the uploaded file must be in the.bmp format and not more than 525х Custom Reports Settings This option allows you to add the custom header and footer texts in the report and use a custom logo instead of the default one. To change the custom header and footer of the report, define the text in the Header text and Footer text fields (the maximum length of the header and footer text is 1000 symbols). To use a custom logo instead of the default logo in the generated reports, select the Use a custom logo instead of the Ekran System logo option, click Choose File, and select the logo. The uploaded file must be in the.bmp,.jpg or.png format and not more than 300x Custom Subjects. 255

256 This option allows you to define the subjects to be used in notifications sent by Ekran System. Subjects for the single alert and multiple alerts notifications can be defined. For the single alert notifications, you can use the following variables: #name alert name; #user - user name; #pc endpoint name; #priority - alert priority; #OS - OS of the endpoint for alerts. For the multiple alert notifications, you can use only a variable for the number of instances in the (#number). To restore the default settings, click Restore Default. Defining SIEM Integration Log settings allow you to enable creation of a log file, define the data to be written to it, and the cleanup frequency. Depending on the format, log files can be viewed and analysed by the Splunk and ArcSight monitoring software (CEF), or by IBM QRadar software (LEEF). Editing of log settings is available to users with the administrative Database management permission. NOTE: The Advanced SIEM Integration functionality is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. To define log settings, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the SIEM Integration tab. The settings include: 1. General Settings Create a log file: This option allows you to enable log file creation. Log format: This option allows you to select the log file format (CEF or LEEF). Log file location: This option allows you to define the location to store a log file. Date format: This option allows you to define the date format for a log file. 2. Log File Contents In this section, you can define the data to be written to a log file. Windows and Linux Client records: This option allows adding all session records of Windows and Linux Clients to a log file. Alert events: This option allows adding all alert events of Windows and Linux Clients to a log file. Management Tool Log Events: This option allows adding all Management Tool Log records to a log file. 3. Cleanup Settings In this section, you can define the parameters for the cleanup operation. Cleanup daily at: This option allows you to define the time to execute the cleanup operation on a daily basis. 256

257 Cleanup every: This option allows you to define the frequency of the cleanup operation. Maximum file size (GB): This option allows you to define the maximum size of a log file. NOTE: During each cleanup operation, the current log file is renamed (the date and time of the cleanup operation is added to its name) and a new one is created in the same folder. Not to run out of space on the Server computer where the log files are stored, it is recommended to check the used disk space regularly and delete the log files, which are no longer in use. Defining Ticketing System Integration Settings Ticketing system integration settings allow you to enable integration with the ticketing system and define the access parameters for it. Currently, integration with such ticketing systems as SysAid and ServiceNow is available. If you want Ekran System to be integrated with any other ticketing system, contact our support team: support_team@ekransystem.com. Editing of ticketing system integration settings is available to users with the administrative Database management permission. NOTE: The Ticketing System Integration functionality is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. The settings include: Enable authentication via ticketing system: This option allows you to enable integration with the ticketing system. Ticketing system: This option allows you to select the ticketing system (SysAid or ServiceNow). For the SysAid ticketing system, define the following parameters: o Ticketing system URL: This option allows you to define a valid URL address for the SysAid ticketing system. NOTE: For the SysAid ticketing system, URL must be entered in the following format: <SysAid URL>/services/SysaidApiService o Account name: This option allows you to define the name of the account the serial key is associated with. o Login: This option allows you to define the login of the user account to get the access to the ticketing system. o Password: This option allows you to define the password of the user account to get the access to the ticketing system. For the ServiceNow ticketing system, define the following parameters: o Instance name: This option allows you to define the ServiceNow instance name. o Login: This option allows you to define the login of the user account to get the access to the ticketing system. o Password: This option allows you to define the password of the user account to get the access to the ticketing system. 257

258 Defining LDAP Targets About You can integrate Ekran System with various domains by creating a connection with their Active Directory Domain Controllers. In such a way, you can add domain users/user groups allowing them to access the Management Tool and Client computers with enabled Forced User Authentication. For each LDAP target, you have to specify the LDAP path and credentials of a domain user for the Ekran Server to be able to establish connection with the domain controller. Automatic LDAP Target If Ekran System Server is to be installed on the computer that is a member of an Active Directory domain, this domain will be automatically added to the LDAP targets during the Server installation. It will be marked as automatic LDAP target. If the computer with Ekran System Server has been added to a domain after the Server installation or has been moved to another domain, you can add/update the automatic LDAP target manually. In addition, you can change the credentials of the domain user, which are saved for the automatic LDAP target, by clicking Edit for this target and specifying new credentials on the Edit LDAP Target page. To add/update the automatic LDAP target manually, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 3. On the Configuration page, select the LDAP Targets tab and then click Refresh Automatic LDAP Target. 4. If there is no automatic LDAP target, it will be added. If there is an automatic LDAP target added, it will be updated. Adding LDAP Target Manually To add a new LDAP target manually, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 3. On the Configuration page, select the LDAP Targets tab and then click Add LDAP Target. 4. On the Add LDAP Target page, define the following parameters: LDAP Path: Define the LDAP path for the Active Directory domain controller you want to connect to in the following format: LDAP://<Domain Controller name or IP address>/dc=<domain name>,dc=<suffix> E.g., for the test.app.local domain with the EKRANAPP domain controller, define the following: LDAP://EKRANAPP/DC=test,DC=app,DC=local. 258

259 Domain NetBIOS Name: Define the NetBIOS name of the domain you want to connect to. User: Define the name of the user belonging to the Active Directory domain you want to connect to. Password: Define the password of the user account belonging to the Active Directory domain you want to connect to. 5. Optionally, define the domain administrator credentials which are required to use the privileged accounts feature (PASM). Click Finish 6. On the LDAP Targets tab, a new LDAP target is displayed in the grid. Editing LDAP Target To edit the existing LDAP target, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 3. On the Configuration page, select the LDAP Targets tab and then click Edit in the grid. 4. On the Edit LDAP Target page, edit the LDAP target parameters and the domain administrator credentials. Then click Finish. Deleting LDAP Target To delete the existing LDAP target, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Database management permission. 2. Click the Configuration navigation link to the left. 3. On the Configuration page, select the LDAP Targets tab and then click Delete in the grid. 4. In the confirmation message, click Delete. 5. The LDAP target is deleted from the grid. The users from the corresponding domain will be unable to access the Management Tool and the Client computers as Forced Authentication users anymore. Defining Date & Time Format Date & time format settings allow you to define the date and time format for the Management Tool and the Server. Editing the date and time format is available to users with the administrative Client installation and management permission. To define date & time format, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the Date & Time Format tab. The settings include: 1. Management Tool Date & Time Format These user-specific settings apply to all the pages available in the Management Tool. 259

260 The Management Tool date format option allows you to define the date format for the Management Tool. The Management Tool time format option allows you to define the time format for the Management Tool. 2. Server Date & Time Format These settings apply to the features processed on the Server: Forensic Export, Alert Notifications, USB Alerts, and Reports (generated via the Report Generator & Scheduled Reports). The Server date format option allows you to define the date format for the Server. The Server time format option allows you to define the time format for the Server. The settings allow you to choose between the following date formats: Date Format Example dd/mm/yyyy 23/02/2017 mm/dd/yyyy 02/23/2017 yyyy/mm/dd 2017/02/23 The settings allow you to choose between the following time formats: Time Format Example HH/mm/ss 08:20:15 H/mm/ss 8:20:15 hh/mm/ss tt h/mm/ss tt 08:20:15 AM 8:20:15 AM Defining Server Settings Server Settings allow you to define default locations for Forensic Export Storage and Reports Storage. This might be used when working with Ekran System in the high-availability mode. To define server settings, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the Server Settings tab. The settings include: Forensic Export Storage: This option allows you to define the location to store results of forensic export. The Reports Storage: This option allows you to define the location to store reports. 260

261 Settings Available for Tenant Admin Defining System Settings System settings allow the tenant admin to grant access to the tenant data to the technician. After getting an access, the technician can login under the tenant admin account and will be able to perform all actions as tenant admin. To grant access to tenant account information, click the Configuration navigation link to the left. On the System Settings tab, select the Grant a technician full access to my tenant account option and click Save. Defining Customization Settings Customization settings allow the tenant admin to define the subjects to be used in notifications sent by Ekran System. Subjects for the single alert and multiple alerts notifications can be defined. For the single alert notifications, you can use the following variables: #name alert name; #user - user name; #pc endpoint name; #priority - alert priority; #OS - OS of the endpoint for alerts. For the multiple alert notifications, you can use only a variable for the number of instances in the (#number). To restore the default settings, click Restore Default. Defining Date & Time Format Date & time format settings allow the tenant admin to define the date and time format for the Management Tool and the Server. Editing the date and time format is available to users with the administrative Client installation and management permission. To define date & time format, click the Configuration navigation link to the left and open the Date & Time Format tab. The settings include: 1. Management Tool Date & Time Format These user-specific settings apply to all the pages available in the Management Tool. The Management Tool date format option allows you to define the date format for the Management Tool. The Management Tool time format option allows you to define the time format for the Management Tool. 261

262 2. Server Date & Time Format These settings apply to the features processed on the Server: Forensic Export, Alert Notifications, USB Alerts, and Reports (generated via the Report Generator & Scheduled Reports). The Server date format option allows you to define the date format for the Server. The Server time format option allows you to define the time format for the Server. The settings allow you to choose between the following date formats: Date Format Example dd/mm/yyyy 23/02/2017 mm/dd/yyyy 02/23/2017 yyyy/mm/dd 2017/02/23 The settings allow you to choose between the following time formats: Time Format Example HH/mm/ss 08:20:15 H/mm/ss 8:20:15 hh/mm/ss tt h/mm/ss tt 08:20:15 AM 8:20:15 AM 262

263 Health Monitoring About With the help of Health Monitoring, Ekran System allows you to monitor the system state, the resource usage on the Server computer and view information about the lost Clients. NOTE: The Health Monitoring feature is available only if you have an activated Enterprise serial key. The System State tab includes detailed information about the error events occurring in Ekran System which helps to monitor the system health and react to any problems in time. The Server Resource Monitoring dashboards include information on the resource usage by the Server process which helps to analyze its performance and respond in case of any problems. The Offline Clients tab includes information about the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period. System State Viewing System Errors and Notifications Viewing the system errors and notifications is available for the users of the Administrators user group in the Single-tenant mode and for the users of the default tenant that have the administrative Tenant management and System configuration permission in the Multi-tenant mode. To monitor the system state, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left and open the System state tab. Information about the disk space used by the binary data is displayed on the Database Storage Usage dashboard at the top of the System state page. The list of all error events is displayed in the form of grid. The grid includes the following information: Date: Displays the time when the error event was detected. Category: Displays the category the error event occurred belongs to. Source: Displays the place where the error event occurs: Server, Database or Health Monitoring log. Details: Displays the description of the error event. Severity: Displays how serious the error event is. Delete All: Allows deleting information about the error event. You can change the size of the columns and hide them. To hide the columns in a grid, click next to the System state tab and select Manage hidden columns. Drag the header of the corresponding column to the Hidden Columns area. 263

264 Also, you can filter and sort the information about the errors in the grid. By default, the following filters are displayed: When: Allows filtering error events by the time period. The result error events list includes all error events for the set period. To set the time period, select one of the following and click Apply: - Define the number of latest hours, days, weeks, or months. - Define the start date and the end date of the time period. Category: Allows filtering error events by a specific category. Source: Allows filtering error events by their source. To add other filters, click More criteria and select a filter from the opened list: Details: Allows filtering error events by their description. Severity: Allows filtering error events by their effect (None, Medium or Critical). To sort error events in the System state grid, click the required column header. You can change the column sort order from ascending to descending, and vice versa. To do this, click the Sort arrow near the column header. If data is not sorted by this column, the Sort arrow is hidden. To export filtered data, click next to the System state tab and select Export filtered records. In the Save As window, browse to the location, where the data should be saved, and click Save. Critical Error Threshold If the number of errors is more than 100 per 1 minute, an error recording to the Health Monitoring log is stopped and the Critical error threshold error appears. Usually, this indicates that Clients fail to record data to the database. The recording to the Health Monitoring log is resumed when the frequency of errors is under 100 per 1 minute. Receiving Notifications on Error Events To receive notifications about the error events, click Configuration. On the Configuration page, you have the following options: next to the System state tab and click Send notification about error events: This option allows you to notify the investigator on every error event. Minimal interval between the same error events (min): This option defines how frequently the notifications about the same error events will be sent. For example, if this parameter is set to 5 minutes and the same error events occur during this period of time, the investigator will receive one notification every 5 minutes instead of receiving 5 notifications every minute or even more. By default, it is set to 10 minutes. Send notification in case of no errors every (hours): This option defines the frequency the notifications should be sent with in case no error events appear in the Health Monitoring log. 264

265 field: In the field, define an address to which the notifications will be sent. You can define several addresses separating them with a semicolon (;). To save the settings, click Save. Server Resource Monitoring The current state of the Server is displayed on the dashboards at the top of the System state page. The CPU Usage dashboard contains a chart with statistics on CPU usage by the Ekran Server process in percent. The dashboard is updated every second. The Memory Usage dashboard contains a chart with statistics on memory usage by the Ekran Server process (private working set) in MB. The dashboard is updated every second. The Database State dashboard contains information about the average number of the Client data insertions to the database per minute. Information about the number of the records in the queue to be inserted to the database is displayed at the bottom of the dashboard. NOTE: The maximum size of the queue is 64 records. If this limit is reached, Clients stop sending data to the Server and store it in the offline cache until the queue size decreases. Downloading Log Files Log files contain information that might be useful for administrator for detecting problems in the system if any. You can either analyse the log files yourself to get more information on what is happening in your system or send them to the Support team to help them in detecting the source of problems in your system. To download the Management Tool log file, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left, click next to the System state tab and select Download MT log file in the menu. In the Save As window, browse to the location, where the log file should be saved, and click Save. The log file will be downloaded to your computer. To download the Server log file, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left, click next to the System state tab and select Download Server log file. In the Save As window, browse to the location, where the log file should be saved, and click Save. The log file will be downloaded to your computer. Please note that every time the Server restarts, a new log file is created. The latter log file can be downloaded via Management Tool, other log files can be viewed in C:\Program Files\Ekran System\Ekran System\ServerLogs. 265

266 Offline Clients ( Lost ) Enabling Offline ( Lost ) Clients Detection Ekran System allows you to receive an notification about the Clients that are offline for more than specified time period. Such Clients are called lost. To enable the offline Clients detection: 1. Click the Client Management navigation link to the left. 2. Select the Client or the Client group to be detected and click Edit Client/Edit Client Group. 3. On the Editing Client page, on the Properties tab, in the Client Mode group, select the Notify if the Client is offline for more than option. 4. Define the time period after which the Client will be detected as lost. By default, it is set to 1 day. 5. In the Send notification to field, define an address to receive notifications in case when the Client is lost. You can define several addresses separating them with a semicolon (;). If you don t want to receive an notification, leave this field empty. 6. Click Finish to save the changes. Viewing Offline ( Lost ) Clients Viewing the offline ( lost ) Clients is available for users with the administrative Client installation and management permission. In the Multi-tenant mode, each tenant user views only Clients of its tenant. To view the offline ( lost ) Clients, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left and open the Offline Clients page. Information about the current status of the Clients is displayed on the Clients dashboard at the top of the Offline Clients page. The list of all Clients that are offline for more than specified time period is displayed in the form of grid. The grid includes the following information: Date: Displays the time when the Client was detected as offline or appeared online again. Category: Displays the online or offline status of the Client. Source: Displays the Client name. Details: Displays information about the time period after which the Client was detected as offline for the offline Clients, and information about appearing online again for the online Clients. Delete All: Allows deleting information about the Client. You can change the size of the columns. Also, you can filter and sort the information about the offline Clients in the grid. By default, the following filters are displayed: 266

267 When: Allows filtering Clients by the time period. The result Clients list includes all Clients for the set period. To set the time period, select one of the following and click Apply: - Define the number of latest hours, days, weeks, or months. - Define the start date and the end date of the time period. Category: Allows filtering Records by a specific category. Source: Allows filtering out information about the specific Client. To add filtering by details, click More criteria and select Details. To sort Clients in the Offline Clients grid, click the required column header. You can change the column sort order from ascending to descending, and vice versa. To do this, click the Sort arrow near the column header. If data is not sorted by this column, the Sort arrow is hidden. To export filtered data, click next to the Offline Clients tab and select Export filtered records. In the Save As window, browse to the location, where the data should be saved, and click Save. 267

268 Viewing Monitoring Results Session List About Monitored data received from Windows, macos and Linux Clients is organized in the session. The Windows Client session includes recorded user activity (screenshots, application names, activity titles, captured keystrokes, clipboard text data, and URLs). The macos Client session includes recorded user activity (screenshots, application name, Activity title, URL, etc.). Windows and macos Clients start recording user activity in a new session every time the computer is restarted. The maximum duration of one session can be 24 hours. At 00:00 all live sessions are terminated. After their termination (their status changes from live to finished), new live sessions automatically start. The remote Linux Client session contains the list of executed commands, their parameters, and functions. Linux Clients start recording a new monitoring session each time the remote SSH terminal is opened. There is no time limitation for a remote Linux Client session. The remote Linux session for X Window System contains screenshots of the applications started from the remote SSH terminal. The local Linux Client session for X Window System includes recorded user activity (screenshots, application name, activity title, activity time). The maximum duration of one local session can be 24 hours. At 00:00 all live sessions are terminated. After their termination (their status changes from live to finished), new live sessions automatically start. Client Sessions List To view monitored sessions, click the Monitoring Results navigation link to the left and then the Client Sessions page opens. The Client Sessions page is divided into two panes: Search & Filtering pane Sessions grid The search pane allows you to perform search in the session data and perform the Forensic Export. The list of all sessions is displayed in the form of grid. The grid includes the following information: Alerts: Allows opening all alert events for the session in the Alert viewer. The colour of the alert icon corresponds to the highest alert risk level detected in the session. User name: Displays the name of the user logged in to the Client computer. NOTE: If Forced User Authentication is enabled on the Client, the user name is displayed as: <logged in Windows/Linux user> (<secondary authentication user> or <user s >). 268

269 Client Name: Displays the name of the computer on which the Client is installed. Remote Host Name: Displays the the name of the remote computer, from which the connection to the Client computer is established. OS: Displays the operating system type (Windows or Linux). Type: Displays the session type (Live or Finished). Start: Displays the date and time when the session started. Last Activity: Displays the date and time of the last created screenshot or executed Linux command. Finish: Displays the date and time when the session finished. If the session has the Live status, this field is empty. Duration: Displays the duration of the finished session. If the session has the Live status, this field is empty. IPv4: Displays the IPv4 address of the Client computer. IPv6: Displays the IPv6 address of the Client computer. Remote IPv4: Displays the local IPv4 address of the remote computer, from which the connection to the Client computer is established. Remote Public IPv4: Displays the public IPv4 address of the remote computer, from which the connection to the Client computer is established. Remote IPv6: Displays the local IPv6 address of the remote computer, from which the connection to the Client computer is established. Remote Public IPv6: Displays the public IPv6 address of the remote computer, from which the connection to the Client computer is established. Domain: Displays the name of the domain to which the Client belongs. User s comment: Displays user s comment entered on the login to the Client computer. Client Description: Displays the custom Client description. Client Group: Displays the name of the Client Group to which the Client belongs. If the Client belongs to the All Clients group only, the column is empty. You can change the order and size of the columns and hide columns. To change the order of the columns in a grid, drag and drop the header of the corresponding column where you want it to be in the grid. To hide the columns in a grid, click Hidden columns corresponding column to the Hidden columns area., and drag the header of the NOTE: If the user logs into the Client computer remotely, when the Client session has already been started, via one of the following remote desktop applications, the remote IP-address will not be detected: DameWare, Radmin, UltraVNC, or TightVNC. Filtering Sessions A user can filter out sessions by metadata in one of the following ways: By specific parameters 269

270 By searching in session data Filtering by Specific Parameters This type of filtering allows you to filter sessions by a set of specific parameters. The filtering parameters are applied instantly. You can filter sessions by multiple criteria. For each non-date filter, you can select more than one filtering parameter. With each selected parameter, the session list is re-filtered. By default, the following filters are displayed: Who: Allows filtering sessions by a specific user logged into the Client computer. Where: Allows filtering sessions by a specific Client. When: Allows filtering sessions by the time period. The result session list includes all sessions containing the activities for the set period. To set the time period, select one of the following: - Define the number of latest hours, days, or weeks. - Define the start date and the end date of the time period. To add other filters, click More criteria and select a filter from the opened list: Type: Allows filtering sessions by their type (Live or Finished). OS: Allows filtering sessions by the operating system type (Windows or Linux). Start: Allows filtering sessions by the date and time the session started. Last Activity: Allows filtering sessions by the date and time of the last screenshot or executed Linux command. Finish: Allows filtering sessions by the date and time the session finished. If the session has the Live status, this field is empty. Duration: Allows filtering sessions by their duration. If the session has the Live status, this field is empty. IPv4: Allows filtering sessions by the IPv4 address of the Client computer. IPv6: Allows filtering sessions by the IPv6 address of the Client computer. Remote IPv4: Allows filtering sessions by the local originating IPv4 address. Remote Public IPv4: Allows filtering sessions by the public originating IPv4 address. Remote IPv6: Allows filtering sessions by the local originating IPv6 address. Remote Public IPv6: Allows filtering sessions by the public originating IPv6 address. Domain: Allows filtering sessions by the name of the domain to which the Client belongs. Client Description: Allows filtering sessions by the custom Client description. Client Group: Allows filtering sessions by the name of the Client Group to which the Client belongs. User s Comment: Allows filtering sessions by the comment entered to the additional message. To remove the extra filter from the filtering pane, click X on the filter button. 270

271 Searching in the Session Data You can search for sessions using a search expression (keyword). You can find sessions containing the search expression in: Application names Activity titles Keystrokes Clipboard text data URLs Linux commands and parameters Alert names USB rule names Linux command output NOTE: For the search to be performed in Linux command output, select the Search in output (Linux) option. This option is displayed if there is at least one Linux session recorded. You can search for sessions using a list of keywords. To perform search by a list of keywords, do the following: 1. Create a.txt file with a list of keywords. Keywords must be separated by a paragraph or a space. 2. Click the Browse button next to the search field and select the created.txt file. 3. Click the search icon to begin the search. NOTE: Searching for a large number of keywords or in a large number of sessions might take much time and affect the Server performance. In the list, you can define the number of sessions to perform search in. The search is performed in the sessions displayed in the Session grid in accordance with the session sorting order. Export Sessions To perform forensic export of all filtered out sessions, click. In the confirmation window, click Export. The Forensic Export History page opens, displaying the export progress. As soon as the export process finishes, the resulting files become available for downloading. Click Download to download the file with Forensic Export results. Sorting Sessions To sort sessions in the Session grid, click the required column header. You can change column sort order from ascending to descending, and vice versa. To do this, click the Sort arrow near the column header. If data is not sorted by this column, the Sort arrow is hidden. 271

272 Playing Sessions About The Session Viewer is a part of the Management Tool that provides the possibility to view monitored data within one selected session. To open the Session Viewer, select one of the sessions in the Sessions grid on the Monitoring Results page and click on it. Session Viewer Interface By default, the Session Viewer interface is divided into the following areas: Session Player pane: Allows viewing screenshots made on the computer with the Windows Client installed, or visually recreated interactive data of the recorded Linux terminal (input and output as the user sees them in the terminal). The navigation section allows you to manage the playback of the video of screenshots or commands. NOTE: If the screenshot creation is not enabled on the Windows Client, sessions of this Client will contain no screenshots. [Windows Client] Details pane: Allows viewing the keystrokes and the clipboard text data associated with the selected record, USB device information, and URL addresses of websites visited by a user. Metadata pane: Displays the session data in the form of grid, which includes: o Activity time, Activity title, Application name, Text data, Alert/USB rule name, and URLs for Windows Clients; o Activity time, Command, Function, Parameters, and Alert name for Linux Clients. 272

273 Session Player The Session Player allows viewing screenshots made on the computer with the Windows Client installed, or graphic representation of the recorded Linux terminal (input and output as the user sees them in the terminal). You can view them separately by selecting the required record from the Metadata grid or play all monitored data in the form of video. The following actions are available: To play/pause the video playback, click Play/Pause. To move from one record to another, click To the beginning, To the end, Previous, or Next. To open the Player to the full-screen mode, double-click the Player or. To return from the full-screen mode, double-click the Player or. To move from one monitor to another in the Client sessions with multiple monitors, click All, 1, 2, etc. To define the speed with which monitored data changes in the Player area, click. The available speed options are 1/2/4/8/16 frame(s) per second. To block the user, click. To view the list of alert events for this session in the Alert viewer, click. To receive the link to a certain position in the session, click. To download a displayed screenshot, click. To perform forensic export, click. To view the Live session in the real-time, click. Magnifier If you need to view data displayed in the Player in detail, use the Magnifying Glass option. To enlarge the certain part of the played data, do the following: 1. Click the Magnifying Glass. 2. The Magnifier window opens on the right. 3. Move the rectangle across the displayed data. 273

274 To turn off the Magnifying Glass, click the Magnifying Glass again. Getting Data URL The Get data URL feature allows retrieving the link of the certain position of the session. You can use this URL to: Open the Session Viewer for playing the required session from the same position; Bookmark certain position in the session using the browser bookmarking mechanism. To get data URL, do the following: 1. Click on the Navigation pane under the Player. 2. The URL Data window opens. 3. Copy the URL and click Close. 4. Enter the copied URL into the browser address bar. 5. The Session Viewer opens. NOTE: If you are logged out, the login page opens before Session Viewer. 6. The Player starts playing records from the selected position in the session. Metadata Grid Metadata grid is located to the right of the Player. It contains detailed information on monitored user activity. Information is displayed in the grid with the following columns: [Windows Client] Activity Time: Displays the date and time or the recorded activity. Activity Title: Displays the name of the active window that is associated with recorded activity. Application Name: Displays the name of the application started on the Client computer. URL: Displays the top and second-level domain name of the visited web resource. Text Data: Displays the clipboard data. Alert/USB Rule: Displays the name of the triggered alert or USB rule. The colour of an alert highlighting corresponds to the alert risk level. o The alerts with the critical risk level will be highlighted in red colour. o The alerts with the high risk level will be highlighted in yellow colour. o The alerts with the normal risk level will be highlighted in blue colour. [macos Client] Activity Time: Displays the date and time or the recorded activity. 274

275 Activity Title: Displays the name of the active window that is associated with recorded activity. Application Name: Displays the name of the application started on the Client computer. URL: Displays the top and second-level domain name of the visited web resource. Alert: Displays the name of the triggered alert. The colour of an alert highlighting corresponds to the alert risk level. o The alerts with the critical risk level will be highlighted in red colour. o The alerts with the high risk level will be highlighted in yellow colour. o The alerts with the normal risk level will be highlighted in blue colour. [Linux Client] Activity Time: Displays the date and time when the command was executed. Command: Displays the command being executed. Function: Displays the system call made. Parameters: Displays the full parameters of the executed command. Alert: Displays the name of the triggered alert. The colour of an alert highlighting corresponds to the alert risk level. o The alerts with the critical risk level will be highlighted in red colour. o The alerts with the high risk level will be highlighted in yellow colour. o The alerts with the normal risk level will be highlighted in blue colour. By default, the data is sorted by Activity Time. You can change the order and size of the columns. Player and Metadata Synchronization The Session Viewer can work in two modes: In the Synced View mode, data in the Metadata grid and Player are synchronized while session playing, i.e., metadata associated with the data being currently played is highlighted in the Metadata grid. This mode is available unless any filtering and searching is performed in the Metadata grid. In the Filtered View mode, data in the Metadata grid and Player are not synchronized while session playing. In this mode, the Player displays all data in the session, whereas data is Metadata grid is being filtered and searched. After selecting the session in the Client Sessions list without previous searching, the Player opens in the Synced View mode. As soon as you perform any filtering or searching, the Synced View mode is automatically changed to the Filtered View mode. To switch the modes, click Back to Synced View/Back to Filtered View above the Metadata grid. 275

276 Filtering Data You can filter the metadata in the Metadata grid on the Player page in one of the following ways: Via searching Via filtering by column After data filtering, the Session Player switches to the Filtered View mode. Filtering via searching The Search field allows you to find metadata containing search expression in: Activity title Application Name Keystrokes Clipboard text data USB Device Info URL Linux Command Linux Command Parameters Linux Functions To find the required metadata, enter the keyword into the Search field and press Enter. Data in the Metadata grid is filtered according to the search expressions. Filtering by Column You can filter sessions using the column header menu in the Sessions grid. To filter sessions by the not date field (Client name, OS, User name, etc.), click required column name, select one or several options, and then click OK. near the To filter sessions by the date field (Start, Last Activity, or Finish), click column name, select the From and To dates, and then click OK. near the required You can filter data by multiple fields. Sorting Data To sort metadata in the Metadata grid, click the required column header. You can change column sort order from ascending to descending, and vice versa. To do this, click the Sort arrow next to the column header. If the data is not sorted in this column, the Sort arrow is hidden. 276

277 Live Sessions The Session Viewer allows you to view Client Live sessions in the real time, i.e., while the monitoring of the Client computer is still in progress. To play a live session, do the following: 1. Click on the session with the type Live in the Client Sessions grid. 2. The Session Player opens in the full screen mode. The Metadata grid is hidden. 3. Data in the Player will be refreshed as soon as a new monitored data is received from the Client. To stop playing the Live session, click. After this, data stops auto-updating and the session can be played in the same way as Finished sessions. To resume playing the Live session, click. NOTE: If you are viewing the session of the Windows Client with the enabled Capture screen on each event without timeout option, it may affect CPU usage and cause performance slowdown due to the great number of received screenshots. Windows Client Sessions Playing Windows Sessions A user starts playing Windows Session by clicking the required Session in the Client Sessions list. The session is opened in the new tab or new window depending on the browser settings. While playing Windows sessions, you can view screenshots in the Player pane and associated metadata (Application name, Activity title, URL, keystrokes, clipboard text data) in the Metadata grid. If a record containing keystrokes or clipboard text data is selected in the Metadata grid, the detailed information is displayed in the Details pane. Viewing Clipboard Text Data The captured clipboard text data includes text, which has been copied or cut and then pasted into documents, files, applications, browser address line, etc. on the Client computers. The Client monitors the Copy, Cut, and Paste operations performed by using either the context menu commands or such key combinations as Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Ins, Ctrl+X, Shift+Del, etc. The captured clipboard text data is displayed in the Text data column in the Metadata grid. It has a label specific to the performed operation: [Clipboard (Copy)] [Clipboard (Paste)] When you select a record in the Metadata grid, the clipboard text data associated with it is displayed in the Details pane below the Player pane. 277

278 Metadata grid Text placed to the clipboard Text pasted from the clipboard Viewing USB Device Info During the monitoring process, the activity is recorded every time the mass storage USB device is plugged in. Along with the screenshot (if the screenshot creation is enabled), the information on the plugged in device is displayed in the Metadata grid as follows: Activity title: USBStorage - <device details> Application name: [Monitoring event] If you are using rules for kernel-level USB monitoring according to which the devices are detected or blocked, each time the alert event occurs, a screenshot is created. In the Metadata grid, this is indicated by highlighting the activity in the grid. 278

279 NOTE: If the screenshot creation is not enabled on the Windows Client, sessions of this Client will contain no screenshots. When you select a USB-device-related screenshot or a row in the Metadata grid, the USB device info associated with it is displayed in the Details pane below the Player pane. If the device was blocked, it is marked as BLOCKED in the parentheses. Viewing URLs If the URL monitoring option is enabled for the Windows Client, then each time the user activity is captured while the user is working in the browser, the URL address is saved and displayed in the URL column in the Metadata grid. If there are several records made while the user is viewing one page on a certain website, then all of them contain the same URL information. NOTE: If the screenshot creation is not enabled on the Windows Client, sessions of this Client will contain no screenshots. The URL column contains only top and second-level domain names even if the parameter is not selected in the URL monitoring settings for the Windows Client. The full URL address is displayed in the Details pane. NOTE: As getting a URL address to be monitored may take about 600 milliseconds, there is a possibility that the screenshot and its activity title along with URL address may be not properly synchronized in the Session Viewer (e.g., the user may see a screenshot with a URL address that belongs to the previous one). Viewing Idle State Windows Client idle activity will be registered and displayed as Idle in the Metadata grid if the appropriate options in the Monitoring parameters are selected. 279

280 macos Client Sessions Playing macos Sessions A user starts playing macos Session by clicking the required Session in the Client Sessions list. The session is opened in the new tab or new window depending on the browser settings. While playing macos sessions, you can view screenshots in the Player pane and associated metadata (Application name, Activity title, URL, etc.) in the Metadata grid. Viewing URLs If the URL monitoring option is enabled for the macos Client, then each time the user activity is captured while the user is working in the browser, the URL address is saved and displayed in the URL column in the Metadata grid. If there are several records made while the user is viewing one page on a certain website, then all of them contain the same URL information. The URL column contains only top and second-level domain names even if the parameter is not selected in the URL monitoring settings for the Windows Client. The full URL address is displayed in the Details pane. NOTE: As getting a URL address to be monitored may take about 600 milliseconds, there is a possibility that the screenshot and its activity title along with URL address may be not properly synchronized in the Session Viewer (e.g., the user may see a screenshot with a URL address that belongs to the previous one). Linux Client Sessions Playing Remote SSH Sessions A user starts playing Linux Session by clicking on the required session in the Client Sessions list. The session is opened in the new tab or new window depending on your browser settings. While playing remote Linux sessions, you can view all visually recreated interactive data in a form of a video in the Player pane and function and system calls, as well as the executed commands with parameters in the metadata grid. If a user opens a new application with X Window System forwarding, the Linux Client creates records that contain screenshots of the application window along with the whole user desktop. NOTE: The X Window System forwarded applications are monitored only if Access Control is disabled on the target X Window System server. To view records of actions, click the name of the started application with the Play icon in the Action column. To return to the SSH terminal session, click Return to session above the session player. 280

281 Playing Local X Window System Sessions A user starts playing Linux Session by clicking on the required session in the Client Sessions list. The session is opened in the new tab or new window depending on your browser settings. While playing local Linux sessions, you can view screenshots in the Player pane and associated metadata (Application name, Activity title, Activity time) in the Metadata grid. Filtering EXEC Commands By default, the commands are filtered by exec function to display only the command executed after user input. To display the list of all commands, including system ones, discard the filtering by clearing the Show only execution commands option. Viewing Alerts About The Alert viewer is a part of the Management Tool which allows viewing detailed information on alert events. You can open the Alert Viewer from the following places: The Session Player: The Alert viewer displays all alert events for the session. The list of Client sessions: The Alert viewer displays all alert events for the selected session. The Recent Alerts dashboard: The Alert viewer displays all alert events that happened within the defined time interval for the selected alert. The Alert Management page: The Alert viewer displays the latest 100 events for the selected alert. Alert Viewer Interface The Alert viewer displays the following information for each alert notification: Alert Risk Level: The colour of the alert icon in the upper left corner of the Alert Viewer corresponds to the alert risk level. o The alerts with the critical risk level will be highlighted in red colour. o The alerts with the high risk level will be highlighted in yellow colour. o The alerts with the normal risk level will be highlighted in blue colour. Alert name: The name of the alert that has triggered the event. 281

282 Alert viewing pane: A screenshot made on the computer with the Windows Client installed, or graphic representation of the recorded Linux data (input and output as the user sees them in the terminal). Metadata information: o Who: The name of the user associated with the alert event. o Where: The name of the Client for which the alert was triggered. o When: The time and date of the alert event. o What: For Windows Clients: The activity title, the application name, and the URL (if available) For Linux Clients: The command name and the parameters For USB events: The device class, the status (detected/blocked), and the device details. Using Alert Viewer You can do the following in the Alert Viewer: To display/hide the metadata associated with the alert event, click below the metadata information. To move between the alert events, use the Previous, Next, First, and Last buttons. To enlarge a certain part of the played data, click the Magnifying Glass. The Magnifier window opens on the right. Move the rectangle across the displayed data. To open the session in the Session Player, click Open Session. The Session Player opens in a new tab. The session playback starts with the selected alert event. 282

283 To view the Alert events for the Windows Clients, select Windows Events tab. To view the Alert events for the Linux Clients, select Linux Events tab. Archived Sessions About During the archiving & cleanup operation all the old Client sessions are archived and then deleted from the current Ekran System database. This allows saving the monitored data in a secure storage and viewing the archived sessions in the Session Viewer any time. Changing Investigated Database To change the archive database, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Viewing archived data permission. 2. Click the Database Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Database Management page, select the Archived Sessions tab. 4. On the Archived Sessions tab, click Change Investigated Database. 5. In the Change Investigated Database window, select the Use current archive database option if you want to view sessions from the current database or the Use another database option if you want to view sessions from another archive database. 6. Define the following parameters: For MS SQL database, define the instance of the SQL server, the name of the archive database, and the user name and password. For Firebird database, define the location of the archive database and the location of binary data. NOTE: You can attach the archive database only of the same type as your current one. 7. If necessary, click Test Database Connection to check that there is a connection with the archive database. 8. Click Save. Viewing Archived Sessions To play an archived session, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the administrative Viewing archived data permission. 2. Click the Database Management navigation link to the left. 3. On the Database Management page, select the Archived Sessions tab. 4. On the Archived Sessions tab, a list of sessions of an archive database is displayed. 5. Click on the target session to open it in the Session Viewer. 6. Work with sessions from the archive databases is the same way as with Client Sessions. 283

284 Dashboards About Ekran System allows viewing certain types of information using dashboards displayed on the Home page. Some dashboards are duplicated on the Health Monitoring page. Dashboards provide you with convenient real-time view of the most important data. The following dashboards are available: Licenses Clients Database Storage Usage Recent Alerts Latest Live Sessions Sessions out of Work Hours Rarely Used Computers Rarely Used Logins CPU Usage Memory Usage Database State With the dashboards, you can see several types of data grouped in one place. The dashboards are customizable, with the customization settings stored on the Server. Thus, if you log into the Management Tool from any other computer, your dashboards will look the same way as you have previously customized them. You can choose which dashboards to show or hide, rearrange the dashboards on the screen, add several dashboards of the same type to see the same data in different variations, and more. Dashboard Types Licenses The Licenses dashboard allows you to view statistics on the number of available licenses, free licenses, and unlicensed computers. The dashboard is updated every 5 minutes. 284

285 The dashboard contains the following elements: The number of not licensed Clients. Pie charts, where you can see the number of licenses assigned to Clients, and the number of free licenses. The number of pie charts depends on the number of available license types. The Assign Licenses to Clients button that redirects you to the License Management page where you can assign licenses to Clients. You can define the following settings for the Licenses dashboard: Used Licenses sector colour. Free Licenses sector colour. To view the dashboard, you need to have the administrative License management permission. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Clients The Clients dashboard allows you to view statistics on the number of Clients which are currently online, offline or lost. The dashboard is updated every minute. 285

286 The Clients dashboard contains the following elements: A pie chart that presents statistics on the number of Clients which are currently online and offline. The Install More Clients button that redirects you to the Computers without Clients page where you can install Clients on the computers. You can define the following settings for the Clients dashboard: Online Clients sector colour. Offline Clients sector colour. Lost Clients sector colour. To view the dashboard, you need to have one of the following permissions: The administrative Client Installation and Management permission. With this permission, you can see information on all the clients in the system. At least one of the Client permissions. In this case, you will see only the Clients for which you have the Client permission(s). If you do not have the administrative Client Installation and Management permission or any Client permissions, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Database Usage Storage The Database Usage Storage dashboard allows you to view statistics on the disk space used by the binary data. By default, your binary files are stored in the same place as the database. However, you can store them in a separate location. 286

287 The Database Storage Usage dashboard contains the following elements: A pie chart that displays statistics on how much space is used and free on the disk the binary files are stored at. The Database Cleanup button that redirects you to the Database Cleanup page. You can define the following settings for this dashboard: Critical free space size: the free size limit at which you are alerted that available space is running low. Used storage size sector colour (indicating how much storage space is used). Total storage size sector colour. Warning storage size sector colour (indicating that the free space size has fallen below the critical free space size threshold). To view the dashboard, you need to have the administrative Database Management permission. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Recent Alerts The Recent Alerts dashboard contains a bar chart that presents information on alerts triggered within a specific time period. The dashboard is updated every 15 minutes. 287

288 Each bar in the graph corresponds to an enabled alert. The length of each bar corresponds to the number of notifications received within a specific time interval. The colour of each bar corresponds to the alert risk level. The alerts with the critical risk level are highlighted in red colour. The alerts with the high risk level are highlighted in yellow colour. The alerts with the normal risk level are highlighted in blue colour. To see the list of alert events, click on the bar with the alert name. In the opened window, the following information is displayed: Time Client name User name To open a corresponding session in the Session Viewer, click Play. To view the alert events in the Alert Viewer, click Open Alert Viewer. You can define the following settings for the Recent Alerts dashboard: Time interval: the period for which the alerts are selected. Sort type: the category by which the alerts are sorted: o Count: allows sorting the alerts by amount of alert notifications. o Alphabetic: allows sorting by the alert name. Sort direction: the order in which the alerts are listed. Critical risk level: the colour of the bars for the alerts with the Critical risk level. High risk level: the colour of the bars for the alerts with the High risk level. Normal risk level: the colour of the bars for the alerts with the Normal risk level. 288

289 Only information about the Clients the user has Client Viewing Monitoring Results permission for is displayed in the dashboard. If you do not have this permission for any of the Clients, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Latest Live Sessions The Latest Live Sessions dashboard contains a grid that displays the list of the sessions which are currently live and were the latest to start. The dashboard is updated every 5 minutes. The grid has the following columns: Start Client name User name To open the session in the Session Viewer, click Play. In the settings, you can define the number of sessions to be displayed in the list. Only information about the Clients the user has Client Viewing Monitoring Results permission for is displayed in the dashboard. If you do not have this permission for any of the Clients, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Sessions out of Work Hours The Sessions out of Work Hours dashboard contains a column chart that displays the statistics on the computers used during non-work hours and days for a defined time period. The dashboard is updated every hour. 289

290 Each column corresponds to the day with the sessions out of work hours. The height of the columns corresponds to the number of sessions recorded on the date. To see the number of sessions recorded on a specific date, hover over the corresponding column. To see the list of sessions recorded on a specific date, click the corresponding column. In the opened window, the following information is displayed: Client Name User Name Start Last Activity Finish To see the session in the Session Viewer, click Play. You can define the following settings for the Sessions out of Work Hours dashboard: Period: set the specific time period for which the alerts are selected. Colour: set the specific colour for the columns. Work hours & Work days: set the hours and days of the week to be considered as a working schedule. Only the sessions with the activities out of the defined schedule are displayed in the dashboard. To view the dashboard, you need to have the administrative Client Installation and Management permission. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Rarely Used Computers The Rarely Used Computers dashboard contains a grid with statistics on the Client computers that have the fewest sessions for the defined time interval. The dashboard is updated every hour. 290

291 The grid has the following columns: Client Name Sessions To view detailed information on the sessions, click the target Client Name link. In the opened window, the following information is displayed: User Name Start Last Activity Finish To open a session in the Session Viewer, click Play. You can define the following settings for the Rarely Used Computers dashboard: Period: the period for which the sessions are selected. Sessions fewer than: the number of sessions the computer must have not to be considered rarely used. Only information about the Clients the user has Client Viewing Monitoring Results permission for is displayed in the dashboard. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Rarely Used Logins The Rarely Used Logins dashboard contains a grid with statistics on the users that have the fewest logins for the defined time interval. If Forced User Authentication is enabled, the <logged in Windows user> (<secondary authentication user>) pair is accounted for. The dashboard is updated every hour. The grid has the following columns: User Name Sessions To view detailed information on the sessions, click the target Client Name link. In the opened window, the following information is displayed: 291

292 Client Name Start Last Activity Finish To open a session in the Session Viewer, click Play. You can define the following settings for the Rarely Used Computers dashboard: Period: the period for which the sessions are selected. Sessions fewer than: the number of sessions the user must have not to be considered rarely logging in. Only information about the Clients the user has Client Viewing Monitoring Results permission for is displayed in the dashboard. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. CPU Usage The CPU Usage dashboard allows you to view a chart with statistics on CPU usage by the Ekran Server process in percent. The dashboard is updated every second. You can define the CPU Usage chart colour. To view the dashboard, you need to have an activated Enterprise serial key. Also, you need to belong to the Administrators user group of the built-in default tenant in the Single-tenant mode or have the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission in the Multi-tenant mode. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. 292

293 Memory Usage The Memory Usage dashboard contains a chart with statistics on memory usage by the Ekran Server process (private working set) in MB. The dashboard is updated every second. You can define the Memory Usage chart colour. To view the dashboard, you need to have an activated Enterprise serial key. Also, you need to belong to the Administrators user group of the built-in default tenant in the Single-tenant mode or have the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission in the Multi-tenant mode. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Database State The Database State dashboard contains information about the average number of the Client data insertions to the database per minute. Information about the number of the records in the queue to be inserted to the database is displayed at the bottom of the dashboard. NOTE: The maximum size of the queue is 64 records. If this limit is reached, Clients stop sending data to the Server and store it in the offline cache until queue size decreases. 293

294 You can define the Database State chart colour. To view the dashboard, you need to have an activated Enterprise serial key. Also, you need to belong to the Administrators user group of the built-in default tenant in the Single-tenant mode or have the administrative Tenant management and system configuration permission in the Multi-tenant mode. If you do not have this permission, you will see an empty dashboard with the text saying you do not have the permissions for viewing this data. Also, the dashboard will not be displayed in the Add dashboard drop-down list. Customizing Dashboards The dashboard layout is customizable. You can choose which dashboards you want to see on the Home page. The following options are available: Add a dashboard. Click Add dashboard over the dashboard area and then select the desired dashboard from the drop-down list. You can add several dashboards of the same type to view the desired information in different variations. You can have up to eight dashboards on the Home page. Hide a dashboard. Click the icon in the top right corner to hide the dashboard. Collapse/expand a dashboard. Use the and icons in the top left corner of the dashboard to collapse or expand it. You can also choose what your dashboards will look like. The following options are available: Rearrange the dashboards. Click on the dashboard you want to move and drag it to a new location. Resize a dashboard. Click on one of the bottom corners of the dashboard and drag the border of the dashboard. Define the settings for a dashboard. Click the icon in the top right corner of the dashboard to change its settings. The customization settings are user-specific and are stored on the Server. To restore the default settings, click Restore Layout over the dashboard area. 294

295 Interactive Monitoring About Interactive Monitoring allows viewing the detailed information on the total time spent by the user in each application/on each website. Viewing Data The information on all applications and URL monitored data is displayed in the form of two column charts (Applications Monitoring chart and URL Monitoring chart). The number of columns corresponds to the number of applications used and websites visited. Only information on the Clients the user has Client Viewing Monitoring Results permission for is displayed. To view the monitored data, do the following: 1. Define the specific parameters to filter out the data: Who: filter by a specific user logged into the Client computer. Where: filter by a specific Client. When: filter by the time period. To set the time period, select one of the following: - Define the number of latest days or weeks. If you define 1 day, sessions recorded during the current day will be displayed. - Define the start date and the end date of the time period. 2. Click Generate. 3. The filtered out monitored data is displayed in both charts. To zoom in and out of the Application Monitoring and URL Monitoring charts, use mouse scroll. Applications Monitoring Chart The Applications Monitoring chart displays information on the applications the users have worked with on Client computers. Each column in the chart corresponds to an application. The length of a column corresponds to the amount of time spent in that application within a specified time interval. The total time spent by the user in all applications is displayed in the top right corner of the chart. To set the order of application bars being displayed, in the Applications filter select one of the following: 20 least used: 20 least used applications sorted in the ascending order. 20 most used: 20 most used applications sorted in the descending order. All (descending): all bars in the descending order. 295

296 All (ascending): all bars in the ascending order. To see the list of sessions containing information on the target application, click on the column with the application name. In the opened window, the following information is displayed: Client Name: the name of the Client computer on which the target application was launched. User Name: the name of the user logged in to the Client computer. NOTE: If Forced User Authentication is enabled on the Client computer, the user name is displayed as: <logged in Windows user> (<secondary authentication user>). Start: the start time of a session. Last Activity: the date and time of the last made screenshot or executed Linux command. Finish: the date and time when the session finished. To open a corresponding session in the Session Viewer, click Play. URL Monitoring Chart The URL Monitoring chart displays information on the websites users have visited on Client computers. Each column in the chart corresponds to a website. The height of a column corresponds to the amount of time spent on that website within a specified time interval. The total time spent on all websites is displayed in the top right corner of the chart. To set the order of URL bars being displayed, in the URLs filter select one of the following: 20 most visited: 20 most visited sites sorted in the descending order. 20 least visited: 20 least visited sites sorted in the ascending order. All (descending): all bars in the descending order. All (ascending): all bars in the ascending order. To see the list of sessions containing information on the target website, click on the column with the website name. In the opened window, the following information is displayed: Client Name: the name of the Client computer on which the target application was launched. User Name: the name of the user logged in to the Client computer. NOTE: If Forced User Authentication is enabled on the Client computer, the user name is displayed as: <logged in Windows user> (<secondary authentication user>). Start: the start time of a session. Last Activity: the date and time of the last made screenshot or executed Linux command. Finish: the date and time when the session finished. To open a corresponding session in the Session Viewer, click Play. 296

297 Forensic Export About Forensic Export allows exporting the session in the encrypted form for viewing monitored session on any computer, even without access to the Management Tool. The session is exported into the signed executable file, which contains the embedded player for displaying graphical information and metadata. The validity of forensic export results can be checked via the Management Tool. The results of export are stored on the Server until you delete them. Exporting Session Fragment To export the session fragment, do the following: 1. Open the Session Viewer page for the selected session. 2. In the Player, select the start point of the session fragment. 3. Click Session Forensic Export under the Player. 4. The Session Forensic Export window opens. 5. Select the Export session fragment starting from current Player position option and enter the required fragment start and end time of the required fragment. 6. Click Export. 7. The Forensic Export History page opens, displaying export progress. 8. As soon as export process finishes, the resulting file becomes available for downloading. 9. Click Download to download the file with Forensic Export results. Exporting Full Session To export the session, do the following: 1. On the Session Viewer page for the selected session, click Session Forensic Export under the Player. 2. The Session Forensic Export window opens. 3. Select the Export full session option. 297

298 4. Click Export. 5. The Forensic Export History page opens, displaying export progress. 6. As soon as export process finishes, the resulting file becomes available for downloading. 7. Click Download to download the file with Forensic Export results. Exporting Multiple Sessions To export multiple sessions, do the following: 1. Log in to the Management Tool as a user with the Viewing monitoring results permission. 2. Сlick the Monitoring Results navigation link to the left. 3. On the Client Sessions page, filter sessions by necessary criteria. 4. In the Client Sessions drop-down list, select the Export filtered sessions option. 5. The Sessions Forensic Export window opens. 6. Optionally, to protect exported sessions with a password, select the Protect with password option and enter the password in the Password and Confirm password boxes. 7. Click Export to continue. 8. The Forensic Export History page opens, displaying export progress. 9. As soon as export process finishes, the resulting files become available for downloading. 10. Click Download for each exported session to download the Forensic Export results. NOTE: Forensic export of a large number of sessions might take much time and affect the Server performance. Viewing Forensic Export History The Forensic Export History page displays the grid with all results of export for Clients you have permissions for. You can see exports performed both by you and other users. The Forensic Export History grid contains the following information: Export Date: Displays the date and time when the session was exported. Client Name: Displays the name of the computer on which the Client is installed. User: Displays the name of the user logged in to the Client computer. Session Start Date: Displays the date and time when the session started. Session End Date: Displays the date and the time when the session finished. Export Type: Displays the export type, which can be one of the following: o Full: For the full exported session. o Full (no keystrokes): For the full exported session without keystrokes. o Truncated Full: For the exported session that has more than activities and while exporting has been truncated to 1 GB. o From To: For the time interval included in the exported session. Status: Displays the status of session export (Generated or Generation failed). Full Size: Displays the size of the resulting file (n/a for failed session exporting). 298

299 To download the exported session, click Download in the Forensic Export History grid. To delete the exported session from Server, click Delete in the Forensic Export History grid. Playing Exported Session To view exported data, download it and start the downloaded executable file. NOTE: To view exported data on computers with Linux or Mac operating system, you need to install Mono Framework on them. Follow the instructions at to install Mono Framework on your computer. Sessions are played in the Forensic Export Player. The Forensic Export Player interface is divided into the following parts: Player pane: Allows viewing screenshots made from the computer on which the Windows Client is installed, or visually recreated interactive data of the recorded Linux terminal (input and output as the user sees them in the terminal). The navigation section allows you to manage the playback of the video of screenshots or commands. NOTE: If the screenshot creation is not enabled on the Windows Client, sessions of this Client will contain no screenshots. [Windows Client] Details pane: Allows you to view the text data (keystrokes and clipboard text data) associated with the selected event, USB device information, and URL addresses of websites visited by a user. Metadata pane: Displays the session data in the form of grid, which includes: o Activity time, Activity title, Application name, Text data, and URLs for Windows Clients; o Activity time, Command, Function, and Parameters for Linux Clients. 299

300 NOTE: If the user performing export does not have the Viewing text data permission for this Client, Forensic Export results will contain no text data. You can do one of the following while viewing: To play/pause the video, click Play/Pause in the Player pane. To move from one record to another, use the control buttons in the Player pane. To open the monitored data to the full-screen mode, double-click the monitored data in the Player pane or. To define the speed with which monitored data will change in the Player pane, click. The available speed options are 1/2/4/8/16 frame(s) per second. To enlarge a certain part of the played data, click the Magnifying Glass. To move from one monitor to another in the Client session with multiple monitors, click All, 1, 2, etc. Validating Exported Data Using Management Tool, you can check that exported data is valid and its integrity has not been altered. Please note that data validity must be checked only in the Management Tool connected to the Server via which data has been exported. Any other Server will consider data not valid. To validate exported data, do the following: 1. Click the Forensic Export History navigation link to the left and then click Validate Export Results. 2. On the Forensic Export Results validation page, click Choose File to select the.exe file with forensic export results. 3. The file is uploaded to the Server and validated. 4. If file validity is confirmed, you will see a message: The file is validated successfully! 300

301 Troubleshooting Quick Access to Log Files Log files contain information that might be useful for administrator for detecting problems in the system if any. You can either analyse the log files yourself to get more information on what is happening in your system or send them to the Support team to help them in detecting the source of problems in your system. To download the Management Tool log file, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left, click next to the System state tab and select Download MT log file in the menu. In the Save As window, browse to the location, where the log file should be saved, and click Save. The log file will be downloaded to your computer. To download the Server log file, click the Health Monitoring navigation link to the left, click next to the System state tab and select Download Server log file. In the Save As window, browse to the location, where the log file should be saved, and click Save. The log file will be downloaded to your computer. Please note that every time the Server restarts, a new log file is created. The latter log file can be downloaded via Management Tool, other log files can be viewed in C:\Program Files\Ekran System\Ekran System\ServerLogs. Database/Server Database/Server Related Issues Issue I cannot start the Server from the Server tray. There are too many records in the database. I have defined a new database, what happened to the old one? I need to transfer the data from an old database to a new one/i want to change the type of the database without losing data. Cause/Solution To start the Server, the Server tray service must be started under the administrator account. Use the automatic or manual database cleanup feature to remove the old records from the database. To do this, in the Management Tool, click the Database Management navigation link and define the cleanup settings on the corresponding tabs. The old database remains in place and is not changed. Unfortunately, the data cannot be transferred from one database to another. 301

302 Issue I have transferred the SQL database to another computer. I have changed the location of the Firebird database. I have installed a new version of the Server and I want to use the old database. I have used the database cleanup feature, but the size of the database didn t change. I have accidentally removed the database from the MS SQL Server. Cause/Solution Unfortunately, you can t relocate the SQL database to another computer. Though you can move it to another location on the same PC with SQL means. To redefine the location of the Firebird database, move it to another location and change the corresponding values in the Windows Registry Editor. See Moving the Server Database chapter for more details. If you have updated the Server, your old database will remain. If you have reinstalled the Server, you need to use a new database. The cleanup feature only removes data from the database, but does not change the size reserved by it. To reduce the size of the database, click Shrink database on the Database Options tab on the Database Management page of the Management Tool. You need to define a new database. To do this, you need to reinstall the Server. I cannot shrink the database: the Shrink database button is absent in the Management Tool on the Database Options tab. Make sure you use the MS SQL Server database. The shrinking cannot be performed if the cleanup procedure is in progress. My antivirus blocks the Server uninstallation/update. Due to the uninstaller specifics some anti-viruses might detect it as a false positive during virus scan. In this case, it is recommended to disable your anti-virus during Server uninstallation/update. Database/Server Related Error Messages The following table provides the list of error messages related to databases and the Server and their causes and possible solutions. These messages may appear in the Management Tool, from the Server tray service, or during the installation of the Server. Message Cause/Solution If you get the following message in the Management Tool: "Connection with The Server has lost the connection to the MS SQL Server. Please make sure 302

303 Message MS SQL database is lost. Please check that the database is accessible and try again." If you get the following message when trying to restart the Server service: Not enough permissions to restart the Server. Cause/Solution that the MS SQL Server is running and it is online and accessible. To check that the MS SQL Server computer is accessible, enter the following command in the Windows command line: ping <name of the MS SQL Server computer> The connection to the MS SQL Server is blocked by the Firewall. Try disabling the Firewall on the MS SQL Server side. You can restart the Server service only under the administrator account. If you get the following error while trying to clean up the database: "Error occurred while clearing the database. Please try again." The program encountered an unexpected error while trying to clear the database. Try clearing the database again. Make sure the Server service is running. There was a problem with connection to the database. Please make sure that the computer on which the database is installed is online and accessible. To check that the computer is accessible, enter the following command in the Windows command line: ping <name of the computer with installed database> If the problem comes up again, please, send us logs (the Server Service file), which you can find in the Server sub-folder of the Ekran System installation folder. If you get the following message from the Server tray service: "The Server connection with the database has been lost. Click to view logs." The Server has lost the connection to the database. Please make sure that the computer on which the database is installed is online and accessible. To check that the computer is 303

304 Message Cause/Solution accessible, enter the following command in the Windows command line: ping <name of the computer with installed database> If the problem comes up again, please, send us logs (the Server Service file), which you can find in the Server sub-folder of the Ekran System installation folder. If you get one of the following messages while trying to perform an action with database: "An error occurred when shrinking database. Please try again." "Error occurred while retrieving database info. Please try again." The program encountered an unexpected error while trying to perform an action with database. Please try performing the action again. There was a problem with connection to the database. Please make sure that the computer on which the database is installed is online and accessible. To check that the computer is accessible, enter the following command in the Windows command line: ping <name of the computer with installed database> If the problem comes up again, please, send us logs (the Server Service file), which you can find in the Server sub-folder of the Ekran System installation folder. Management Tool Management Tool Related Issues Issue HTTP 500 Internal Server error is displayed when I try to connect to the Management Tool. Cause/Solution For Windows 7, follow these instructions: 1. Make sure that all the following options are selected in the Windows Features window: Net Framework 3.5> Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation and Windows 304

305 Issue The license management function is unavailable and I cannot assign licenses to Clients. I have no Internet connection on the computer with the installed Server and cannot activate serial keys. Cause/Solution Communication Foundation non-http Activation. 2. Run the Command Prompt (cmd.exe) as administrator: Enter %windir%\microsoft.net\framework\v4.0.xxxxx\ aspnet_regiis.exe iru (for 32 bit computer) or %windir%\microsoft.net\framework64\v4.0.xxx xx\aspnet_regiis.exe iru (for 64 bit computer). Example: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework64\v \aspnet_regiis.exe iru 3. Press Enter. For Windows 10, 8.1 or 8, make sure that all the following options are selected in the Windows Features window: Net Framework 3.5> Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation and Windows Communication Foundation non-http Activation. Make sure you have the administrative Client installation and management and License management permissions. In the Single-tenant mode, if you have this permission, but the license management function is still unavailable, then your copy of the program is not licensed. Please purchase serial keys and activate them online or activate them on your vendor s license site and add them offline. In the Multi-tenant mode, if you are a user of a not default tenant, contact your technician to make sure you have the granted licenses. You can activate the serial on the license site of your vendor and then add activated keys on the computer with the installed Server. I have reinstalled/updated the Server and now there are no activated serial keys in it. If you activated serial keys online, after you reinstall or update the Server, activated serial keys will be automatically synchronized. For this purpose, you need to have an active Internet connection during the first start of the Server. 305

306 Issue The list of the domain computers is empty during the Client installation. The list of the domain computers is not complete during the Client installation. The target computer is out of the domain. I have assigned a Terminal Server Client license instead of a Workstation Client license to the Client or I have assigned a license to the wrong Client. There are some Clients that I did not install. I do not receive notifications, although the parameters are correct. Cause/Solution If you used an offline activation (added activated serial keys), you need to add them in the Management Tool again. This problem can be caused by network or Windows issues (e.g., your computer cannot connect to the local network). If there are no network problems, try searching for computers via the Add computers by IP option. To install Clients in such a way, on the Computers without Clients page click Add computers by IP. Ekran System obtains the list of domain computers using standard Windows methods, which do not always provide the full list of computers. If DNS settings of your computer network allow, you can: Search for computers using the Add computers by IP option. To install Clients in such a way, on the Computers without Clients page, click Add computers by IP. Create an installation package and install a Client locally on the target computer. To generate an installation package, on the Computers without Clients page, click Download installation file and then select the type of the installation file you want to download. When the installation file is downloaded to your computer, you can start the installation process. Any license can be unassigned from a Client anytime. These may be old Clients that were installed earlier. You can uninstall them remotely via the Management Tool or locally on the Client computer. Make sure you do not use Microsoft Exchange Server 2010, which is not supported. 306

307 Issue Some of the Management Tool functions are unavailable. The Management Tool page is displayed incorrectly. Some of the navigation links are not displayed on the Management Tool page. I do not want to provide the user with access to all Clients. I forgot the password of the internal user. I forgot the password of the tenant admin. The user is able to perform actions that are supposed to be prohibited for them (e.g., the user sees the Clients that they do not have a permission for). I haven t received any reports or alert notifications by . Cause/Solution Make sure that you have the corresponding permissions for these functions. Try clearing the browser cache and cookies and sign in again. Try clearing the browser cache and cookies and sign in again. By defining the Client permissions for the user in the Management Tool, you can define which Clients the user will have the access to. Contact the administrator and ask them to change the password. If the tenant admin is registered via , please contact your technician and ask to resend an with a new password. If the tenant admin is a domain user, contact your system administrator. Check the groups which the user belongs to. They might have inherited some new permissions from these groups. Check the Spam folder. Management Tool Error Messages The following table provides the list of error messages that you may see while working in the Management Tool and their causes and possible solutions. Message If you get the following message when trying to connect to the Management Tool: Server is unavailable. Please contact administrator. Cause/Solution The program encountered an unexpected error while trying to perform an action. Please refresh the Management Tool. Please make sure that the Server is running. Please restart the Server and try again. 307

308 If the problem comes up again, please contact the support. If you get the following message when trying to connect to the Management Tool: Wrong password or username. Please make sure that your login and the password are correct. If you are logging in as a Windows user, do not forget to enter <domain name>\<login>. Viewing Monitored Data Issue Cause/Solution I have successfully logged into the Management Tool but I cannot see any captured data from the Windows Client. An alert event does not trigger an alert notification and is not displayed as alert in the Management Tool. Please check the section Possible Problems with Receiving Data from Clients. Contact the administrator and check if you have the Viewing monitoring results permission for the Client. Please check that the defined alert parameters are correct on the Alert Rules tab on the Edit alert page of the Management Tool (e.g., Process name may be defined instead of Window title). To do this, open the Alert Management page of Management Tool, click Edit alert for the required alert and select the Alert Rules tab. The alert might be disabled. Please make sure the alert is enabled on the Alert properties tab in the Management Tool. I don t receive alert notifications about all the events that correspond to notification settings. Please check the Minimal interval between notifications sent for the same alert event parameter. If less time than defined in the settings has passed since the moment when the last notification for the same alert event had been received, you will not receive the notification. Some screenshots are blank. If a user types something continuously, stops typing, and then switches the window during the 3 seconds period, the keystrokes will be attached to a blank screenshot. If a user accesses the Client computer via the Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) and 308

309 Issue Client sessions contain no screenshots at all. Some screenshots look like they consist of two parts. Cause/Solution minimizes the Remote Desktop Connection window, a blank screenshot is created. Please check that the Enable screenshot creation along with user activity recording option is enabled on the required Client. To do this, open the Client Management page and click Edit Client for the required Client, and then click the User Activity Recording tab. There are two monitors on the Client computer and you see the screenshots from both of them. The Text data column is empty, although the text was copied, cut, and pasted on the Client computer. Check that you have Viewing text data permission for this Client. Please check that you have enabled the clipboard monitoring in the Client configuration. The screenshots are sent more frequently than I defined. Screenshot image is blurry. The screenshot image is black and white. The screenshot time does not correspond to time on my computer. The screenshot time does not correspond to the time that should be displayed on Client computer. If in the Client configuration you have enabled options other than Capture screen periodically, the screenshots may be created more frequently depending on the user activity. Check the Client configuration. The Client computer may have smooth interface animation the screenshot may have been taken when the animation was in progress. The Client is configured to capture screen in greyscale images. Please check the Client configuration in the Management Tool. The screenshot time corresponds to the time displayed on the Client computer. Please check that the Client computer time settings have not been changed. 309

310 Windows Client Checking that the Client Is Installed If the Client is successfully installed, it will appear on the Clients page of the Management Tool in the Data View pane. If there is no Client in the Management Tool, you have to check whether the Client has been installed. You can check if the Client is installed on the investigated computer in one of the following ways: The EkranService.exe process is running. The EkranClient and EkranController services are started. There is a <system disk>:\program Files\Ekran System\Ekran System\Client\ folder with executable files. 310

311 The HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\EkranSystem\Client key has the following values: Clients Installation/Uninstallation Issues and Error Messages The common reasons of issues with remote installation or uninstallation of Clients are the inadequate network configuration or system settings. If you are sure that a user has administrative rights on the Client computer, please check whether all of the conditions for successful installation are met. Remote Installation Error Messages During remote Client installation you can get the following error messages: The user does not have enough permission on the remote host. The network name cannot be found. Client computer must be rebooted before agent installation. The host is unavailable now or turned off. Try again later. Solving Remote Installation Issues If you receive the following error message during the remote Client installation: The User doesn t have enough permission on the remote host, as a rule, such issue may be caused by the following reasons: There is no access to network shares. 311

312 DNS service is unavailable. UAC is enabled (Windows 10/8/7/Vista). Errors in Active Directory. Issues with the Service Principle Name for the domain. Two computers have the same computer name. Issue: There is No Access to Network Shares For successful remote installation, Ekran System needs to access the administrative shares on the target computers. At first, please check that you have access to administrative shares and if there is no access, enable it. How to Check: To check the administrative shares availability, do the following: 1. Open Windows Explorer. 2. In the address bar type \\<target_computer_ip/name>\admin$ and press Enter. 3. When the Enter Network Password window opens, enter administrator credentials and click OK. 4. If the login credentials are accepted, the system folder opens (by default, C:\Windows). If you get an error after performing step 2, try the following: Open the Command Prompt (cmd.exe). Enter and execute the ping <target_computer_name or IP> command. Check the following: 1. If you do not get ping replies, network may be down. Check the network connection and try again. 2. If the network is up, but you do not get the ping reply, check the firewall on the remote computer. Disable the firewall on the target remote computer. 312

Ekran System v.6.1 Deployment Guide

Ekran System v.6.1 Deployment Guide Ekran System v.6.1 Deployment Guide Table of Contents About... 6 System Requirements... 7 Program Structure... 10 Deployment Process... 12 Server and Database... 13 About... 13 Database Types Comparison...

More information

Ekran System v.5.1 Help File

Ekran System v.5.1 Help File Ekran System v.5.1 Help File Table of Contents About... 13 What s New... 14 System Requirements... 16 Program Structure... 18 Getting Started... 19 Deployment Process... 19 Working with Application...

More information

Ekran System v.5.5 Deployment Guide

Ekran System v.5.5 Deployment Guide Ekran System v.5.5 Deployment Guide Table of Contents About... 6 System Requirements... 7 Program Structure... 10 Deployment Process... 12 Server and Database... 13 About... 13 Database Types Comparison...

More information

Ekran System v.5.2 Deployment Guide

Ekran System v.5.2 Deployment Guide Ekran System v.5.2 Deployment Guide Table of Contents About... 6 System Requirements... 7 Program Structure... 9 Deployment Process... 10 Server and Database... 11 About... 11 Database Types Comparison...

More information

Ekran System v.5.5 Getting Started

Ekran System v.5.5 Getting Started Ekran System v.5.5 Getting Started Table of Contents About... 4 System Requirements... 5 Program Structure... 8 Getting Started... 10 Server and Database... 11 Installing the Server... 11 Database Types

More information

Ekran System System Requirements and Performance Numbers

Ekran System System Requirements and Performance Numbers Ekran System System Requirements and Performance Numbers Table of Contents System Requirements... 3 Performance Numbers... 6 Database Statistics... 8 2 System Requirements Ekran System claims different

More information

Ekran System High Availability Deployment Guide

Ekran System High Availability Deployment Guide Ekran System High Availability Deployment Guide Table of Contents About... 3 System Requirements... 4 Program Structure... 5 Deployment Process... 6 About... 6 Prerequisites... 6 General Prerequisites...

More information

Ekran System v Program Overview

Ekran System v Program Overview Ekran System v. 6.2 Program Overview Contents About the Program Login Ekran Server & Management Tool Notifying Users about Being Database Management Monitored Licensing User Blocking Client Installation

More information

Ekran System v Program Overview

Ekran System v Program Overview Ekran System v. 5.1 Program Overview Contents About the Program Ekran Server & Management Tool Database Management Licensing Client Installation Monitoring Parameters Client Protection Advanced User Authentication

More information

Ekran System v.6.1 Troubleshooting

Ekran System v.6.1 Troubleshooting Ekran System v.6.1 Troubleshooting Quick Access to Log Files Table of Contents Quick Access to Log Files... 3 Database/Server... 4 Database/Server Related Issues... 4 Database/Server Related Error Messages...

More information

Bomgar Vault Server Installation Guide

Bomgar Vault Server Installation Guide Bomgar Vault 17.2.1 Server Installation Guide 2017 Bomgar Corporation. All rights reserved worldwide. BOMGAR and the BOMGAR logo are trademarks of Bomgar Corporation; other trademarks shown are the property

More information

Version Installation Guide. 1 Bocada Installation Guide

Version Installation Guide. 1 Bocada Installation Guide Version 19.4 Installation Guide 1 Bocada Installation Guide Copyright 2019 Bocada LLC. All Rights Reserved. Bocada and BackupReport are registered trademarks of Bocada LLC. Vision, Prism, vpconnect, and

More information

Automation Anywhere Enterprise 10 LTS

Automation Anywhere Enterprise 10 LTS Automation Anywhere Enterprise 10 LTS Document Version: 1.3 Installation Guide Date of Publication: 15 th November, 2016 Update(s) to this document edition: Table of Contents 1. Client Prerequisites Processor

More information

ElasterStack 3.2 User Administration Guide - Advanced Zone

ElasterStack 3.2 User Administration Guide - Advanced Zone ElasterStack 3.2 User Administration Guide - Advanced Zone With Advance Zone Configuration TCloud Computing Inc. 6/22/2012 Copyright 2012 by TCloud Computing, Inc. All rights reserved. This document is

More information

Senstar Symphony. 7.2 Installation Guide

Senstar Symphony. 7.2 Installation Guide Senstar Symphony 7.2 Installation Guide Contents Contents Introduction... 3 Symphony Server...3 Symphony Client... 3 Xnet... 3... 4 Symphony Server requirements...4 Symphony Client requirements...4 Symphony

More information

Performing an ObserveIT Upgrade Using the Interactive Installer

Performing an ObserveIT Upgrade Using the Interactive Installer Performing an ObserveIT Upgrade Using the Interactive Installer ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT This document contains detailed procedures and instructions on how to upgrade ObserveIT by using the interactive "One

More information

OnCommand Unified Manager Installation and Setup Guide for Use with Core Package 5.2 and Host Package 1.3

OnCommand Unified Manager Installation and Setup Guide for Use with Core Package 5.2 and Host Package 1.3 IBM System Storage N series OnCommand Unified Manager Installation and Setup Guide for Use with Core Package 5.2 and Host Package 1.3 GA32-1020-03 Table of Contents 3 Contents Preface... 10 Supported

More information

Accops HyWorks v3.0. Installation Guide

Accops HyWorks v3.0. Installation Guide Accops HyWorks v3.0 Installation Guide Last Update: 4/25/2017 2017 Accops Technologies Pvt. Ltd. All rights reserved. The information contained in this document represents the current view of Propalms

More information

Upgrading an ObserveIT One-Click Installation

Upgrading an ObserveIT One-Click Installation Upgrading an ObserveIT One-Click Installation This document was written for ObserveIT Enterprise version 7.6.1. This document uses screenshots and procedures written for Windows Server 2012 R2 and SQL

More information

High Availability Enabling SSL Database Migration Auto Backup and Auto Update Mail Server and Proxy Settings Support...

High Availability Enabling SSL Database Migration Auto Backup and Auto Update Mail Server and Proxy Settings Support... Quick Start Guide Table of Contents Overview... 4 Deployment... 4 System Requirements... 4 Installation... 6 Working with AD360... 8 Starting AD360... 8 Launching AD360 client... 9 Stopping AD360... 9

More information

Migrating vrealize Automation 6.2 to 7.2

Migrating vrealize Automation 6.2 to 7.2 Migrating vrealize Automation 6.2 to 7.2 vrealize Automation 7.2 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition.

More information

StreamSets Control Hub Installation Guide

StreamSets Control Hub Installation Guide StreamSets Control Hub Installation Guide Version 3.2.1 2018, StreamSets, Inc. All rights reserved. Table of Contents 2 Table of Contents Chapter 1: What's New...1 What's New in 3.2.1... 2 What's New in

More information

Storage Manager 2018 R1. Installation Guide

Storage Manager 2018 R1. Installation Guide Storage Manager 2018 R1 Installation Guide Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either

More information

Install and upgrade Qlik Sense. Qlik Sense 3.2 Copyright QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved.

Install and upgrade Qlik Sense. Qlik Sense 3.2 Copyright QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved. Install and upgrade Qlik Sense Qlik Sense 3.2 Copyright 1993-2017 QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved. Copyright 1993-2017 QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved. Qlik, QlikTech, Qlik

More information

Installation Guide. EventTracker Enterprise. Install Guide Centre Park Drive Publication Date: Aug 03, U.S. Toll Free:

Installation Guide. EventTracker Enterprise. Install Guide Centre Park Drive Publication Date: Aug 03, U.S. Toll Free: EventTracker Enterprise Install Guide 8815 Centre Park Drive Publication Date: Aug 03, 2010 Columbia MD 21045 U.S. Toll Free: 877.333.1433 Abstract The purpose of this document is to help users install

More information

Backup App V7. Quick Start Guide for Windows

Backup App V7. Quick Start Guide for Windows Backup App V7 Quick Start Guide for Windows Revision History Date Descriptions Type of modification 30 Jun 2016 First Draft New 25 Nov 2016 Added Restore Options to Ch 8 Restoring Data; Combined Technical

More information

Workstation Configuration Guide

Workstation Configuration Guide Workstation Configuration Guide August 13, 2018 Version 9.6.134.78 For the most recent version of this document, visit our documentation website. Table of Contents 1 Workstation configuration 4 1.1 Considerations

More information

Aspera Connect Windows XP, 2003, Vista, 2008, 7. Document Version: 1

Aspera Connect Windows XP, 2003, Vista, 2008, 7. Document Version: 1 Aspera Connect 2.6.3 Windows XP, 2003, Vista, 2008, 7 Document Version: 1 2 Contents Contents Introduction... 3 Setting Up... 4 Upgrading from a Previous Version...4 Installation... 4 Set Up Network Environment...

More information

Deployment and User Guide Installing and Configuring WhatsUp Gold Failover Manager

Deployment and User Guide Installing and Configuring WhatsUp Gold Failover Manager Deployment and User Guide Installing and Configuring WhatsUp Gold Failover Manager This guide provides information about installing and configuring WhatsUp Gold Failover Manager. Contents CHAPTER 1 Using

More information

Workstation Configuration

Workstation Configuration Workstation Configuration December 12, 2017 - Version 9.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

More information

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11.5

Acronis Backup & Recovery 11.5 Acronis Backup & Recovery 11.5 Installation Guide Applies to the following editions: Update 2 Advanced Server Server for Windows Virtual Edition Server for Linux Advanced Server SBS Edition Workstation

More information

LABEL ARCHIVE Administrator s Guide

LABEL ARCHIVE Administrator s Guide LABEL ARCHIVE Administrator s Guide DOC-LAS2015_25/05/2015 The information in this manual is not binding and may be modified without prior notice. Supply of the software described in this manual is subject

More information

Installing and Configuring VMware Identity Manager Connector (Windows) OCT 2018 VMware Identity Manager VMware Identity Manager 3.

Installing and Configuring VMware Identity Manager Connector (Windows) OCT 2018 VMware Identity Manager VMware Identity Manager 3. Installing and Configuring VMware Identity Manager Connector 2018.8.1.0 (Windows) OCT 2018 VMware Identity Manager VMware Identity Manager 3.3 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on

More information

KYOCERA Net Admin Installation Guide

KYOCERA Net Admin Installation Guide KYOCERA Net Admin Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable for

More information

Install and upgrade Qlik Sense. Qlik Sense 3.0 Copyright QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved.

Install and upgrade Qlik Sense. Qlik Sense 3.0 Copyright QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved. Install and upgrade Qlik Sense Qlik Sense 3.0 Copyright 1993-2016 QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved. Copyright 1993-2016 QlikTech International AB. All rights reserved. Qlik, QlikTech, Qlik

More information

AT&T Core Mobility Integrated Dispatch Console User Guide. Installation Guide. AT&T Integrated Dispatch Console 3.0

AT&T Core Mobility Integrated Dispatch Console User Guide. Installation Guide. AT&T Integrated Dispatch Console 3.0 Installation Guide AT&T Integrated Dispatch Console 3.0 October 2016 Table of Content 1. Introduction... 3 1.1. Purpose and Scope... 3 1.2. Terms and Definitions... 3 1.3. About this Manual... 5 1.4. What

More information

SC-T35/SC-T45/SC-T46/SC-T47 ViewSonic Device Manager User Guide

SC-T35/SC-T45/SC-T46/SC-T47 ViewSonic Device Manager User Guide SC-T35/SC-T45/SC-T46/SC-T47 ViewSonic Device Manager User Guide Copyright and Trademark Statements 2014 ViewSonic Computer Corp. All rights reserved. This document contains proprietary information that

More information

KYOCERA Device Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide

KYOCERA Device Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide KYOCERA Device Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice.

More information

Workstation Configuration

Workstation Configuration Workstation Configuration December 15, 2017 - Version 9.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

More information

KYOCERA Device Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide

KYOCERA Device Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide KYOCERA Device Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice.

More information

LifeSize Control Installation Guide

LifeSize Control Installation Guide LifeSize Control Installation Guide January 2009 Copyright Notice 2005-2009 LifeSize Communications Inc, and its licensors. All rights reserved. LifeSize Communications has made every effort to ensure

More information

Ekran System v.6.0 Privileged User Accounts and Sessions (PASM)

Ekran System v.6.0 Privileged User Accounts and Sessions (PASM) Ekran System v.6.0 Privileged User Accounts and Sessions (PASM) Table of Contents About... 3 Using Privileged User Accounts... 4 Password Vault Configuration... 5 Defining Domain Administrator Credentials...

More information

INSTALLATION AND SET UP GUIDE

INSTALLATION AND SET UP GUIDE INSTALLATION AND SET UP GUIDE This guide will help IT administrators to install and set up NVivo Server. It provides step by step instructions for installing the software, configuring user permissions

More information

Installation Guide. Mobile Print for Business version 1.0. July 2014 Issue 1.0

Installation Guide. Mobile Print for Business version 1.0. July 2014 Issue 1.0 Installation Guide Mobile Print for Business version 1.0 July 2014 Issue 1.0 Fuji Xerox Australia 101 Waterloo Road North Ryde NSW 2113 For technical queries please contact the Fuji Xerox Australia Customer

More information

dctrack Quick Setup Guide (Recommended) Obtain a dctrack Support Website Username and Password

dctrack Quick Setup Guide (Recommended) Obtain a dctrack Support Website Username and Password dctrack 5.0.0 Quick Setup Guide This guide walks you through installing dctrack for the first time. In other words, this is a clean install - it is not an integration of dctrack and Power IQ, and it is

More information

BlackBerry Enterprise Server for Microsoft Office 365. Version: 1.0. Administration Guide

BlackBerry Enterprise Server for Microsoft Office 365. Version: 1.0. Administration Guide BlackBerry Enterprise Server for Microsoft Office 365 Version: 1.0 Administration Guide Published: 2013-01-29 SWD-20130131125552322 Contents 1 Related resources... 18 2 About BlackBerry Enterprise Server

More information

VMware vfabric Data Director Installation Guide

VMware vfabric Data Director Installation Guide VMware vfabric Data Director Installation Guide vfabric Data Director 2.5 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by

More information

Deltek Time & Expense with Employee Self Service Version New Installation for Microsoft SQL Sever

Deltek Time & Expense with Employee Self Service Version New Installation for Microsoft SQL Sever Deltek Time & Expense with Employee Self Service Version 9.0.1 New Installation for Microsoft SQL Sever July 31, 2013 While Deltek has attempted to verify that the information in this document is accurate

More information

Acronis Backup Advanced Version 11.5 Update 6

Acronis Backup Advanced Version 11.5 Update 6 Acronis Backup Advanced Version 11.5 Update 6 APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING PRODUCTS Advanced for Windows Server Advanced for Linux Server Advanced for PC Advanced for VMware / Hyper-V / RHEV / Citrix XenServer

More information

T E KLYNX CENTRAL I N S T A L L A T I O N G U I D E

T E KLYNX CENTRAL I N S T A L L A T I O N G U I D E TEKLYNX CENTRAL I N S T A L L A T I O N G U I D E Note TEKLYNX CENTRAL Installation Guide The information in this manual is not binding and may be modified without prior notice. Supply of the software

More information

Installation Guide for Pulse on Windows Server 2012

Installation Guide for Pulse on Windows Server 2012 USER GUIDE MADCAP PULSE 4 Installation Guide for Pulse on Windows Server 2012 Copyright 2018 MadCap Software. All rights reserved. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. The

More information

MB Exam Code: MB Exam Name: Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2016 Customer Service

MB Exam Code: MB Exam Name: Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2016 Customer Service MB2-714 Number: MB2-714 Passing Score: 800 Time Limit: 120 min File Version: 1.0 Exam Code: MB2-714 Exam Name: Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2016 Customer Service Exam A QUESTION 1 You install Microsoft Dynamics

More information

VMware Horizon JMP Server Installation and Setup Guide. 13 DEC 2018 VMware Horizon 7 7.7

VMware Horizon JMP Server Installation and Setup Guide. 13 DEC 2018 VMware Horizon 7 7.7 VMware Horizon JMP Server Installation and Setup Guide 13 DEC 2018 VMware Horizon 7 7.7 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you

More information

Privileged Identity App Launcher and Session Recording

Privileged Identity App Launcher and Session Recording Privileged Identity App Launcher and Session Recording 2018 Bomgar Corporation. All rights reserved worldwide. BOMGAR and the BOMGAR logo are trademarks of Bomgar Corporation; other trademarks shown are

More information

SafeConsole On-Prem Install Guide

SafeConsole On-Prem Install Guide SafeConsole On-Prem Install Guide This guide applies to SafeConsole 5.0.5 Introduction This guide describes how to install a new SafeConsole server on Windows using the SafeConsole installer. As an option,

More information

vcenter Chargeback User s Guide

vcenter Chargeback User s Guide vcenter Chargeback 1.5 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition. To check for more recent editions

More information

VMware Identity Manager Connector Installation and Configuration (Legacy Mode)

VMware Identity Manager Connector Installation and Configuration (Legacy Mode) VMware Identity Manager Connector Installation and Configuration (Legacy Mode) VMware Identity Manager This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until

More information

SolidWorks Enterprise PDM Installation Guide

SolidWorks Enterprise PDM Installation Guide SolidWorks Enterprise PDM Installation Guide Contents Legal Notices...vi 1 SolidWorks Enterprise PDM Installation Guide...7 2 Installation Overview...8 Required Installation Components...8 Optional Installation

More information

NBC-IG Installation Guide. Version 7.2

NBC-IG Installation Guide. Version 7.2 Installation Guide Version 7.2 2017 Nuance Business Connect 7.2 Installation Guide Document Revision History Revision Date August 8, 2017 Revision List Updated supported SQL Server versions June 14, 2017

More information

Veriato Recon / 360. Version 9.0.3

Veriato Recon / 360. Version 9.0.3 Veriato Recon / 360 Version 9.0.3 1/3/2018 Upgrade Guide January 3, 2018 Table of Contents Before You Begin... 1 What's New... 1 How the System Works... 1 Upgrade Support... 6 Update Antivirus Exclusions...

More information

Micro Focus Enterprise View. Installing Enterprise View

Micro Focus Enterprise View. Installing Enterprise View Micro Focus Enterprise View Installing Enterprise View Micro Focus The Lawn 22-30 Old Bath Road Newbury, Berkshire RG14 1QN UK http://www.microfocus.com Copyright Micro Focus 2009-2014. All rights reserved.

More information

Trend Micro Incorporated reserves the right to make changes to this document and to the products described herein without notice. Before installing and using the product, please review the readme files,

More information

Workstation Configuration

Workstation Configuration Workstation Configuration September 22, 2015 - Version 9 & 9.1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

More information

Cisco Unified Serviceability

Cisco Unified Serviceability Cisco Unified Serviceability Introduction, page 1 Installation, page 5 Introduction This document uses the following abbreviations to identify administration differences for these Cisco products: Unified

More information

VMware Horizon JMP Server Installation and Setup Guide. Modified on 19 JUN 2018 VMware Horizon 7 7.5

VMware Horizon JMP Server Installation and Setup Guide. Modified on 19 JUN 2018 VMware Horizon 7 7.5 VMware Horizon JMP Server Installation and Setup Guide Modified on 19 JUN 2018 VMware Horizon 7 7.5 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/

More information

Installation on Windows Server 2008

Installation on Windows Server 2008 USER GUIDE MADCAP PULSE 4 Installation on Windows Server 2008 Copyright 2018 MadCap Software. All rights reserved. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. The software described

More information

VMware Identity Manager Cloud Deployment. Modified on 01 OCT 2017 VMware Identity Manager

VMware Identity Manager Cloud Deployment. Modified on 01 OCT 2017 VMware Identity Manager VMware Identity Manager Cloud Deployment Modified on 01 OCT 2017 VMware Identity Manager You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware Web site at: https://docs.vmware.com/ The

More information

Diagnostic Manager Advanced Installation Guide

Diagnostic Manager Advanced Installation Guide Diagnostic Manager Publication Date: May 03, 2017 All Rights Reserved. This software is protected by copyright law and international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this software,

More information

Trend Micro Incorporated reserves the right to make changes to this document and to the products described herein without notice. Before installing and using the product, please review the readme files,

More information

User Guide. Version R94. English

User Guide. Version R94. English AuthAnvil User Guide Version R94 English March 8, 2017 Copyright Agreement The purchase and use of all Software and Services is subject to the Agreement as defined in Kaseya s Click-Accept EULATOS as updated

More information

WhatsUp Gold 2016 Installation and Configuration Guide

WhatsUp Gold 2016 Installation and Configuration Guide WhatsUp Gold 2016 Installation and Configuration Guide Contents Installing and Configuring WhatsUp Gold using WhatsUp Setup 1 Installation Overview 1 Overview 1 Security considerations 2 Standard WhatsUp

More information

SafeConsole On-Prem Install Guide. version DataLocker Inc. July, SafeConsole. Reference for SafeConsole OnPrem

SafeConsole On-Prem Install Guide. version DataLocker Inc. July, SafeConsole. Reference for SafeConsole OnPrem version 5.2.2 DataLocker Inc. July, 2017 SafeConsole Reference for SafeConsole OnPrem 1 Contents Introduction................................................ 2 How do the devices become managed by SafeConsole?....................

More information

Installation and Setup Guide

Installation and Setup Guide SnapCenter Software 4.1 Installation and Setup Guide December 2018 215-13401_C0 doccomments@netapp.com Updated for 4.1.1 Table of Contents 3 Contents Deciding whether to read the SnapCenter installation

More information

Data Protection Guide

Data Protection Guide SnapCenter Software 4.0 Data Protection Guide For VMs and Datastores using the SnapCenter Plug-in for VMware vsphere March 2018 215-12931_C0 doccomments@netapp.com Table of Contents 3 Contents Deciding

More information

Setup Guide. Before Setting Up. Installation. Start-up/Shutdown

Setup Guide. Before Setting Up. Installation. Start-up/Shutdown Setup Guide Before Setting Up Installation Start-up/Shutdown For information not in this manual, refer to the HTML/PDF files on the supplied CD-ROM. Read this manual carefully before you use this product

More information

DocuShare Installation Guide

DocuShare Installation Guide DocuShare Installation Guide Publication date: December 2009 This document supports DocuShare Release 6.5/DocuShare CPX Release 6.5 Prepared by: Xerox Corporation DocuShare Business Unit 3400 Hillview

More information

Application Launcher & Session Recording

Application Launcher & Session Recording Installation and Configuration Guide Application Launcher & Session Recording 5.5.3.0 Copyright 2003 2017 Lieberman Software Corporation. All rights reserved. The software contains proprietary information

More information

SnapCenter Software 4.0 Installation and Setup Guide

SnapCenter Software 4.0 Installation and Setup Guide SnapCenter Software 4.0 Installation and Setup Guide March 2018 215-12926_C0 doccomments@netapp.com Table of Contents 3 Contents Deciding whether to read the SnapCenter Installation and Setup Guide...

More information

Installation and Deployment Guide for HEAT Service Management

Installation and Deployment Guide for HEAT Service Management Installation and Deployment Guide for HEAT Service Management Supported Deployment Configurations The section briefly describes the deployment configurations that are supported by the HEAT Service Management

More information

VMware Identity Manager Cloud Deployment. DEC 2017 VMware AirWatch 9.2 VMware Identity Manager

VMware Identity Manager Cloud Deployment. DEC 2017 VMware AirWatch 9.2 VMware Identity Manager VMware Identity Manager Cloud Deployment DEC 2017 VMware AirWatch 9.2 VMware Identity Manager You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/

More information

Venafi Platform. Architecture 1 Architecture Basic. Professional Services Venafi. All Rights Reserved.

Venafi Platform. Architecture 1 Architecture Basic. Professional Services Venafi. All Rights Reserved. Venafi Platform Architecture 1 Architecture Basic Professional Services 2018 Venafi. All Rights Reserved. Goals 1 2 3 4 5 Architecture Basics: An overview of Venafi Platform. Required Infrastructure: Services

More information

VMware App Volumes Installation Guide. VMware App Volumes 2.13

VMware App Volumes Installation Guide. VMware App Volumes 2.13 VMware App Volumes Installation Guide VMware App Volumes 2.13 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have comments about this

More information

Installation Guide Worksoft Certify

Installation Guide Worksoft Certify Installation Guide Worksoft Certify Worksoft, Inc. 15851 Dallas Parkway, Suite 855 Addison, TX 75001 www.worksoft.com 866-836-1773 Worksoft Certify Installation Guide Version 9.0.3 Copyright 2017 by Worksoft,

More information

scconnect v1.x ADMINISTRATION, INSTALLATION, AND USER GUIDE

scconnect v1.x ADMINISTRATION, INSTALLATION, AND USER GUIDE scconnect v1.x ADMINISTRATION, INSTALLATION, AND USER GUIDE GlobalSCAPE, Inc. (GSB) Address: 4500 Lockhill-Selma Road, Suite 150 San Antonio, TX (USA) 78249 Sales: (210) 308-8267 Sales (Toll Free): (800)

More information

Workstation Configuration

Workstation Configuration Workstation Configuration Version 8.2 May 2, 2014 For the most recent version of this document, visit our documentation website. Table of Contents 1 Workstation configuration 3 1.1 Custom level Internet

More information

Storage Center. Enterprise Manager 5.5. Installation and Setup Guide

Storage Center. Enterprise Manager 5.5. Installation and Setup Guide Storage Center Enterprise Manager 5.5 Installation and Setup Guide Enterprise Manager 5.5 Installation and Setup Guide 680-028-010 Revision Date Description A March 2011 Initial release. B April 2011 Updated

More information

Installation Manual. Fleet Maintenance Software. Version 6.4

Installation Manual. Fleet Maintenance Software. Version 6.4 Fleet Maintenance Software Installation Manual Version 6.4 6 Terri Lane, Suite 700 Burlington, NJ 08016 (609) 747-8800 Fax (609) 747-8801 Dossier@dossiersystemsinc.com www.dossiersystemsinc.com Copyright

More information

EXPRESSCLUSTER X SingleServerSafe 3.3 for Windows. Installation Guide. 01/29/2016 3rd Edition

EXPRESSCLUSTER X SingleServerSafe 3.3 for Windows. Installation Guide. 01/29/2016 3rd Edition EXPRESSCLUSTER X SingleServerSafe 3.3 for Windows Installation Guide 01/29/2016 3rd Edition Revision History Edition Revised Date Description 1st 02/09/2015 New manual 2nd 04/20/2015 Corresponds to the

More information

Administering vrealize Log Insight. 05-SEP-2017 vrealize Log Insight 4.3

Administering vrealize Log Insight. 05-SEP-2017 vrealize Log Insight 4.3 Administering vrealize Log Insight 05-SEP-2017 4.3 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have comments about this documentation,

More information

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 18 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are

More information

Backup App v7. Quick Start Guide for Windows

Backup App v7. Quick Start Guide for Windows Backup App v7 Quick Start Guide for Windows Revision History Date Descriptions Type of modification 30 Jun 2016 First Draft New 25 Nov 2016 Added Restore Options to Ch 8 Restore Data; Combined Technical

More information

Covene Cohesion Server Installation Guide A Modular Platform for Pexip Infinity Management October 25, 2016 Version 3.3 Revision 1.

Covene Cohesion Server Installation Guide A Modular Platform for Pexip Infinity Management October 25, 2016 Version 3.3 Revision 1. Covene Cohesion Server Installation Guide A Modular Platform for Pexip Infinity Management October 25, 2016 Version 3.3 Revision 1.0 Table of Contents 1. Overview... 3 2. Upgrading an Existing Installation...

More information

Accops HyWorks v2.5. HyWorks Controller Installation Guide. Last Update: 4/18/2016

Accops HyWorks v2.5. HyWorks Controller Installation Guide. Last Update: 4/18/2016 Accops HyWorks v2.5 Last Update: 4/18/2016 2016 Propalms Technologies Pvt. Ltd. All rights reserved. The information contained in this document represents the current view of Propalms Technologies Pvt.

More information

BioStar INSTALLATION GUIDE. Version 1.00 English

BioStar INSTALLATION GUIDE. Version 1.00 English BioStar 2.6.0 INSTALLATION GUIDE Version 1.00 English Contents Getting Started... 3 System Requirements... 3 BioStar 2 Video Extension... 3 BioStar 2 API Server... 3 Installing BioStar 2... 4 Login...

More information

Edge Device Manager Quick Start Guide. Version R15

Edge Device Manager Quick Start Guide. Version R15 Edge Device Manager Quick Start Guide Version R15 Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates

More information

IBM Single Sign On for Bluemix Version December Identity Bridge Configuration topics

IBM Single Sign On for Bluemix Version December Identity Bridge Configuration topics IBM Single Sign On for Bluemix Version 2.0 28 December 2014 Identity Bridge Configuration topics IBM Single Sign On for Bluemix Version 2.0 28 December 2014 Identity Bridge Configuration topics ii IBM

More information

3M Molecular Detection System Software Upgrade/Installation Instructions

3M Molecular Detection System Software Upgrade/Installation Instructions User Manual Supplement Number: TB.342837.03 Effective Date: March 2018 Supersedes: TB.342837.02 Technology Platform: 3M Molecular Detection System Originating Location: St. Paul, MN 3M Molecular Detection

More information

EMS MASTER CALENDAR Installation Guide

EMS MASTER CALENDAR Installation Guide EMS MASTER CALENDAR Installation Guide V44.1 Last Updated: May 2018 EMS Software emssoftware.com/help 800.440.3994 2018 EMS Software, LLC. All Rights Reserved. Table of Contents CHAPTER 1: Introduction

More information

Proactive-CCTV Server Installation Guide v1.0

Proactive-CCTV Server Installation Guide v1.0 v1.0 For Support Email: michael@proactive-cctv.com www.proactive-cctv.com 1. Getting Started Welcome to the Proactive-CCTV. Please Read Before Starting Installation Initial Setup & Requirements Operating

More information

Amazon AppStream 2.0: SOLIDWORKS Deployment Guide

Amazon AppStream 2.0: SOLIDWORKS Deployment Guide 2018 Amazon AppStream 2.0: SOLIDWORKS Deployment Guide Build an Amazon AppStream 2.0 environment to stream SOLIDWORKS to your users June 2018 https://aws.amazon.com/appstream2/ 1 Welcome This guide describes

More information